Panasonic DMR EH58 User Manual

Operating Instructions  
DVD Recorder  
Instructions/notes regarding SD Cards and  
SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EH68  
model only.  
Model No. DMR-EH68  
Region number supported by  
DMR-EH58  
this unit  
Region numbers are allocated to DVD  
Recorders and DVD-Video according to  
where they are sold.  
t
ar  
ide  
For Asia  
kSt  
c
i
Gu  
u
Q
The region number of this unit is “3”.  
The unit will play DVD-Video marked with  
labels containing “3” or “ALL”.  
Example:  
2
3
s
n
3
ALL  
5
c
o
i
The illustrations in these Operating Instructions show images of the black model of  
DMR-EH58 for Australia and N.Z.  
t
a
r
Basi  
For Australia and N.Z.  
ope  
The region number of this unit is “4”.  
The unit will play DVD-Video marked with  
labels containing “4” or “ALL”.  
Example:  
2
3
4
ALL  
4
For Middle East  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
The region number of this unit is “2”.  
The unit will play DVD-Video marked with  
labels containing “2” or “ALL”.  
Example:  
2
3
2
ALL  
5
Dear customer  
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum  
performance and safety, please read these  
instructions carefully.  
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this  
product, please read the instructions completely.  
Please keep this manual for future reference.  
RQT9075-L  
GC GCS GN  
Table of contents  
Getting started  
Editing  
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Editing still pictures and music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
ted  
Quick Start Guide  
Copying  
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings . . . . . 10  
HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
USB memory and card information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Regarding DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . 14  
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card) . . . . . . . 15  
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video  
format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Copying SD Video from an SD card [EH68] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Copying SD Video from a video equipment [EH68] . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
star  
g
n
i
t
e
G
t
ar  
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Copying all the still pictures on the USB memory—Copy All Pictures . . . . . . . 48  
Copying new still pictures on the SD card—Copy New Pictures [EH68]. . . . . . 48  
Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
About the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Copying music from a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Copying music from a USB memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
To update the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Basic operations  
ide  
kSt  
c
i
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs. . . . . . . 16  
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Timer recording using G-CODE system [For]Australia]and]N.Z.] . . . . . . 18  
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Gu  
u
Q
Advanced operations  
s
n
Important notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Advanced recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Recording modes and approximate recording times . . . . . . . . . 21  
When the format confirmation screen is displayed. . . . . . . . . . . 21  
When removing a recorded disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Advanced timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 24  
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—Direct Navigator . . . . . . 27  
Switching the Direct Navigator appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
To edit the group of titles [HDD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Showing the menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Playing MP3 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
To play music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Convenient functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV . . . . 33  
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI  
ControlTM”). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
c
o
i
t
a
r
Setting menus  
Basi  
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Using on-screen menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Status messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
ope  
HDD, disc and card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Deleting all the contents—Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Selecting the background style–Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first–Auto-Play Select . . . . . 56  
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment–Finalise . . . . . 56  
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
s
n
o
ced  
n
a
v
erati  
p
o
Ad  
g
in  
t
i
Ed  
g
n
i
y
Cop  
Reference  
Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO terminals . . 63  
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal. . . . . . . . . . 64  
Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver . . 64  
Connecting a television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
s
u
n
e
m
g
n
ti  
e
S
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back cover  
e
c
Rfren  
About descriptions in these operating instructions  
These operating instructions are applicable to models  
DMR-EH68 and DMR-EH58. Unless otherwise indicated,  
illustrations in these operating instructions are of the black model  
of DMR-EH58 for Australia and N.Z.  
[EH68] : indicates features applicable to DMR-EH68 only.  
[EH58] : indicates features applicable to DMR-EH58 only.  
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are  
applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.  
Pages to be referred to are indicated as “±±”.  
RQT9075  
3
Included accessories  
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.  
(Product numbers correct as of February 2008. These may be subject to change.)  
[For]Asia]  
2 AC mains leads  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]  
1 Remote control  
1 RF coaxial cable  
2 Batteries  
1 Audio/video cable  
for remote control  
For Thailand  
(N2QAYB000134)  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
1 AC mains lead  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
1 Remote control  
[For]Middle]East]  
2 AC mains leads  
(N2QAYB000133)  
For Saudi Arabia  
For use with this unit only. Do  
not use it with other equipment.  
Also, do not use cords for other  
equipment with this unit.  
The remote control information  
Batteries  
Use  
Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.  
Remote control signal sensor  
Do not use rechargeable type batteries.  
20  
20  
30  
R6/LR6, AA  
30  
Do not mix old and new batteries.  
Do not use different types at the same time.  
Do not heat or expose to flame.  
7 m directly in front of the unit  
Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.  
Do not take apart or short circuit.  
Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.  
Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.  
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can  
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.  
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long  
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.  
Remote control operations (6)  
Official DivX® Certified product.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX®6) with standard  
playback of DivX® media files.  
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of  
DivX, Inc. and are used under license.  
“DTS” is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. and “DTS  
2.0iDigital Out” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is  
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by  
Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing  
uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse  
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Matsushita Electric Industrial  
Co., Ltd.  
RQT9075  
SDHC Logo is a trademark.  
Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and  
are provided under license by ARIS/SOLANA/4C.  
4
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care  
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device  
that is easily susceptible to damage.  
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.  
The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust  
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be  
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains  
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.  
re  
a
c
it  
The HDD is a temporary storage device  
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or  
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.  
e/Un  
Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD  
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this  
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all  
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.  
car  
g
n
i
l
d
n
a
When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.  
h
)
ive  
Setup precautions  
Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or  
r
Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling  
fan and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.  
Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to  
vibration or impact.  
breakdown  
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,  
etc. gets inside the unit.  
skd  
i
d
d
Do not place on anything that  
While operating  
ar  
generates heat like a video cassette  
recorder, etc.  
DO NOT  
Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The  
HDD may become damaged.)  
H
(
Do not place in an area often subject to  
temperature changes.  
Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains  
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.  
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or  
movement due to rotation is normal.  
HD  
This unit  
VCR  
Place in an area where condensation  
does not occur. Condensation is a  
phenomenon where moisture forms on a  
cold surface when there is an extreme  
change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal  
damage to the unit.  
/
n
io  
When moving the unit  
1Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)  
2Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.  
3Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.  
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.  
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a  
short time.)  
rmat  
o
f
in  
Conditions where condensation may occur  
– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving  
from a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa,  
or when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air  
directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during  
operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on  
the inside of the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD  
heads, etc.  
l
o
r
t
n
co  
e
t
mo  
– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.  
– During the rainy season.  
re  
e
h
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit  
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until  
condensation is gone.  
/T  
es  
i
r
HDD recording time remaining  
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which  
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.  
eso  
ac  
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist  
will not increase the amount of time.)  
d
e
d
u
l
c
Indemnity concerning recorded content  
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or  
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a  
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).  
In  
Unit care  
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the  
DO NOT  
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.  
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.  
Do not place the unit on  
amplifiers or equipment  
that may become hot.  
The heat can damage the unit.  
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.  
Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.  
Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the  
instructions that came with the cloth.  
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and  
viewing pleasure.  
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it  
impossible to record or play discs.  
Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,  
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.  
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.  
[Note]  
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.  
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.  
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the  
unit.  
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E  
This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.  
RQT9075  
5
Control reference guide  
Remote control  
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
1Turn the unit on (10)  
2Select drive [HDD, DVD or SD ([EH68])] (16, 17, 30)  
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].  
3Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers  
4To delete unnecessary recorded titles, still pictures or music  
(19, 41)  
5Basic operations for recording and play  
6Skip the specified time (26)  
7Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (26)  
8Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (27, 36)  
9Show OPTION menu (36)  
This menu is used when playing or editing titles and still pictures,  
etc.  
DVD  
TV  
B
B
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
:Select audio (26)  
;Colour buttons  
for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (27, 30, 32)  
for switching Video/Playlists (45)  
for manual tuning settings (57)  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
CH  
<Show on-screen menu (52)  
=Recording functions  
[¥ REC] Start recording (17)  
INPUT SELECT  
8 9  
7
[REC MODE] Change recording mode (17)  
[F Rec] Start Flexible Recording (22)  
>Transmit the remote control signal  
?Television operations (62)  
G-Code  
DELETE  
-/--  
SLOW/SEARCH  
0
SKIP  
@Channel select (17)  
AInput select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (23)  
B[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] Show G-CODE screen (18)  
CExit the menu screen  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
DShow Timer Recording screen (24)  
EShow FUNCTION MENU window (33)  
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main  
functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.  
FReturn to previous screen  
TIME SLIP  
GCreate chapter (26)  
HSkip approx. 1 minute forward (26)  
IShow status messages (53)  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
F Rec  
STATUS  
RQT9075  
6
Main unit  
REC  
guide  
e
nc  
e
r
e
f
e
ꢎ ꢏ  
lr  
o
r
t
[EH68]  
Pull to flip down the front  
panel.  
Con  
REC  
1Standby/on switch (Í/I) (10)  
7USB port (15)  
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In  
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.  
2Disc tray (15)  
8Stop (17, 26)  
9Start play (16)  
:Channel select (17)  
3Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (23)  
4Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (23)  
5Display (below)  
;Start recording (17)/Specify a time to stop recording (17)  
<Remote control signal sensor  
=[EH68] SD card slot (15)  
6Open/close disc tray (15)  
Rear panel terminals (8, 9, 63, 64, 65)  
The unit’s display  
REC  
[EH68]  
PLAY  
1 Copying indicator  
2
Recording indicator Playback indicator Recording/Playback  
indicator  
REC  
REC  
PLAY  
PLAY  
3Timer recording indicator  
4[EH68] SD card slot indicator  
5Disc indicator  
6Drive [HDD, DVD or SD ([EH68])] indicator  
7Main display section indicator  
8Recording mode indicator  
RQT9075  
7
STEP 1 Connection  
Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.  
Refer to “Additional connections” (63) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.  
When the unit is not to be used for a long time  
To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off  
[approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)]  
When “Power Save” is set to “On”, the “Quick Start” function does not work.  
Connecting a television  
To the aerial  
To household mains socket  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Aerial cable  
[For\Saudi\Arabia[  
Television’s rear panel  
BE SURE TO  
READ THE  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz)  
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
CAUTION FOR  
THE AC MAINS  
LEAD ON PAGE  
2 BEFORE  
R
L
Red White Yellow  
CONNECTION.  
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
AC mains lead  
(included)  
Connect only after all other  
connections are complete.  
[For]Middle]East]  
Use the AC mains lead that matches  
the socket for the area you live in.  
[For]Asia]  
Other connections  
(9, 63)  
1 2  
3
4
Audio/Video cable  
(included)  
AC mains lead with a label is for  
Thailand.  
AC mains lead without a label is for  
areas other than Thailand.  
Cooling fan  
RF  
IN  
Red White Yellow  
Y
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal  
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.  
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB  
output on this unit.  
[Required]setting]  
AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (60)  
RQT9075  
8
You can enjoy high-quality picture by changing the connection between this unit and your TV on page 8 as follows.  
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable  
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital  
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to  
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.  
ion  
t
This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3 with Deep Colour) technology.  
c
Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,  
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.  
Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).  
ne  
o
C
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function  
1
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.  
[34, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]  
Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.  
EP  
T
S
It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.  
Recommended part number:  
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.  
Television’s rear panel  
HDMI IN  
HDMI cable  
RF  
IN  
Y
HDMI AV OUT  
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
[Required]setting]  
Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (60). (The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)  
[Note]  
If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (78) and  
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)  
You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.  
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input  
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):  
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)  
RQT9075  
9
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings  
Auto-Setup is complete when you see the clock setting  
menu.  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Clock  
Time  
0
Date  
1
DVD  
TV  
:
00  
:
00  
.
1
.
2007  
BꢀDVD  
B
B
Number  
VOL  
CH  
0
9
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
Please set clock manually.  
OK: store RETURN: leave  
CHANGE  
OK  
SELECT  
RETURN  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
CH  
Numbered  
buttons  
3 Press [2, 1] to select the item you  
INPUT SELECT  
8 9  
want to change.  
7
G-Code  
DELETE  
This is a 24-hour clock.  
The items change as follows:  
-/--  
0
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year  
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J  
Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy (61).  
(Monthly accuracy +/– 15 seconds.)  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
TIME SLIP  
4 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.  
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.  
OK  
5 Press [OK] when you have finished  
the settings.  
,,,ꢄ  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
F
Rec  
STATUS  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Quick Start setting screen appears.  
Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].  
The Quick Start feature (61) enables this unit to be  
ready to start recording as quick as approx. 1 second§  
after turning it on. You can start recording soon after  
deciding you want to record something.  
1 Turn on the television and select the  
appropriate AV input to suit the  
connections to this unit.  
§
Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.  
2 Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit on.  
TV aspect setting screen appears.  
When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link  
TV Aspect  
(34), downloading from the television starts.  
16:9 WIDE TV  
16:9  
Download from TV  
4:3 TV  
Pan & Scan  
Pos  
4
Letterbox  
Download in progress. Please wait.  
RETURN: to cancel  
SELECT  
OK  
RETURN  
RETURN  
6 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect  
You can download the tuning positions from the television for  
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.  
and press [OK].  
16:9:  
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television  
Pan & Scan:  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
The country setting screen appears on the television.  
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,  
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture  
(78).  
Country  
Australia  
New Zealand  
Others  
Letterbox:  
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.  
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style  
(78).  
If your favourite channel is not received  
after selecting this, please start Auto-Setup  
SELECT  
Restart from Setup.  
OK  
RETURN  
To stop partway  
Press [RETURN].  
RETURN: leave OK: access  
Press [3, 4] to select the country and press [OK].  
Pre-set channels are set when you select “Australia” in the  
country setting menu.  
To confirm that stations have been tuned  
Auto-Setup does not start. The clock setting menu  
appears (step 3). If your favourite channel is not  
received after selecting “Australia”, perform “Auto-Setup  
Restart” (58).  
correctly (57)  
To restart set up (58)  
Auto-Setup starts. This takes about 5 minutes.  
Auto-Setup  
1
Auto-Setup in progress. Please wait.  
RETURN: to cancel  
RETURN  
RQT9075  
10  
HDD and disc information  
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play  
(: Possible, : Impossible)  
Disc type  
Logo  
Data that  
can be  
recorded  
and played  
Rewritable Play on other Recording 16:9 Recording both M 1  
Copy-once  
recording  
(CPRM)  
players§1  
aspect picture§2  
and M 2 for bilingual  
broadcasts§2  
Standard symbol  
ion  
t
a
Hard disk drive (HDD)  
Video  
Still picture  
Music  
Video  
Still picture  
m
r
[HDD]  
o
inf  
DVD-RAM  
[RAM]  
c
CPRM (78)  
compatible discs  
only.  
ndis  
§3  
DVD-R  
[-R] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
Video  
Video  
(Either one)  
Da  
/H  
§3  
DVD-R DL§4  
[-R]DL] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
(Either one)  
ings  
t
t
e
s
t
c
e
§3  
DVD-RW  
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
Video  
Video  
Video  
Video  
p
s
(Either one)  
§3  
+R  
(4:3 aspect)  
(4:3 aspect)  
(4:3 aspect)  
[+R] before finalisation  
(Either one)  
ndTVa  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
a
§3  
+R DL§4  
[+R]DL] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
(Either one)  
tings  
§3  
+RW  
[+RW]  
e
s
(Either one)  
§1 [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Finalisation needed for playback on other equipment (56).  
[RAM] can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and DVD-  
RAM compatible DVD players.  
[Note]  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on  
secondary audio recording are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this  
setting “Off” if high speed copy to [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[+RW] is not necessary (The default setting is “On”. 58).  
+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with  
another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However,  
discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.  
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have  
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can  
be recorded onto the HDD.)  
ption  
e
c
e
r
[-R]DL], [+R]DL] or [+RW] can be played back only on equipment  
compatible with these discs.  
l
§2 For further information (20, Important notes for recording)  
§3 The audio selected in “Bilingual Audio Selection” (59) is  
recorded.  
ne  
ha  
C
§4 [-R]DL] [+R]DL] You cannot directly record to these discs (right).  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is  
necessary (55).  
[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend  
you create top menu (56).  
Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.  
2
P
You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the  
discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the  
recording.  
STE  
For available recording times for different discs under different  
recording modes, see “Recording modes and approximate  
recording times” (21).  
Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent  
you from playing or recording certain discs.  
Please see specifications (76) for compatible disc versions and  
recording speeds.  
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL  
disc on this unit.  
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.  
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and  
+R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer,  
single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is  
not enough space on the first layer to record a programme, the  
remainder is recorded on the second layer. When playing a title  
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between  
layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme.  
However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit  
is switching layers.  
Recording format  
This unit records video in the following formats.  
DVD Video Recording format [HDD] [RAM]  
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit  
television broadcasts and so on.  
You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.  
The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be  
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.  
When switching layers:  
Video and audio may momentarily cut  
DVD-Video format [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-  
Video.  
The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be  
recorded even if using a CPRM compatible disc.  
After finalising the disc, you can play the disc on DVD players and  
other equipment.  
Second recordable layer  
The available  
space  
First recordable layer  
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.  
You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar way  
as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.  
The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be  
recorded.  
Title 2  
Title 1  
(Outer section  
of the disc)  
(Inner section  
of the disc)  
Playback direction  
After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the  
disc on DVD players and other equipment.  
DVD-R DL  
+R DL  
RQT9075  
11  
HDD and disc information  
Play-only discs  
Disc type  
Logo  
Standard  
symbol  
[DVD-V]  
Uses  
High quality movie and music discs  
DVD-Video  
DVD-RW (DVD  
Video  
Recording  
format)  
[-RW‹VR›]  
DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder  
You can play programmes that allow One time only recording if they  
have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.  
By formatting (55) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video  
format.  
It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for  
recording.  
DVD-R  
DVD-R DL  
DivX  
DVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivX  
Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW§)  
CD  
[CD]  
DivX, MP3,  
JPEG  
CD-R and CD-RW with video recorded in DivX  
CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3  
CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG  
Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW§)  
Video CD  
[VCD]  
§
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.  
The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating  
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.  
Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.  
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD  
for the type of connected TV  
Discs that cannot be played  
2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm  
3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit  
and not finalised (78).  
Discs recorded with AVCHD format.  
[For]Asia] DVD-Video with a region number other than “3” or “ALL”  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] DVD-Video with a region number other than  
“4” or “ALL”  
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a  
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.  
(: Possible to view, : Impossible to view)  
TV type  
Disc/Titles  
recorded on HDD  
Yes/No  
[For]Middle]East] DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or  
“ALL”  
Multi-system TV  
PAL  
NTSC  
PAL  
DVD-Audio  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,  
SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, etc.  
PAL TV  
§1 (PAL60)  
NTSC  
PAL  
NTSC TV  
§2  
NTSC  
§1 If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the  
picture will not be shown correctly.  
§2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (60).  
When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you  
match the “TV System” setting to the title (PAL or NTSC) (60).  
RQT9075  
12  
USB memory and card information  
USB memories you can use on this unit  
Compatible USB memories  
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP  
protocol:  
ion  
t
USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.  
[EH58] USB memories for USB 2.0 High Speed work as USB 2.0 Full Speed.  
USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.  
USB memories that support bulk only transfer.  
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.  
a
m
r
o
Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.  
dinf  
r
a
MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.  
A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.  
Format  
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.  
UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.  
ndc  
a
y
Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.  
Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.  
mor  
e
Indicated in these  
instructions by  
[USB]  
Bm  
Data that can be played or copied (: Possible, –: Impossible)  
S
File format  
Playing  
DivX  
MP3  
Still pictures (JPEG)  
n/U  
o
i
t
a
Copying to HDD  
Instructions  
m
r
o
You can play DivX files  
recorded with a computer onto  
the USB memory (28).  
You can play and copy to HDD  
MP3 files recorded with a  
computer onto the USB  
memory (29, 50).  
You can play and copy to HDD  
or DVD-RAM still pictures  
recorded with a computer onto  
the USB memory (30, 48).  
inf  
c
Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.  
ndis  
[EH68] If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video shot with the camera to this  
unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.  
Da  
[Note]  
This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.  
HD  
Cards you can use on this unit [EH68]  
SD Memory Card§ (from 8 MB to 2 GB)  
SDHC Memory Card (from 4 GB to 16 GB)  
MultiMediaCard  
Type  
§
Including miniSD Card and microSD Card  
The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.  
Indicated in these  
instructions by  
[SD]  
Data that can be recorded  
and played  
Still pictures (JPEG)  
Video (SD Video)  
Instructions  
You can insert directly into the SD card slot.  
§
A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.  
You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera etc. (30, 48).  
SD Video shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM. (47)  
SD Video cannot be played directly from the SD card.  
Suitable SD cards  
Structure of folders  
¢¢¢: Numbers  
When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display  
the SDHC logo can be used.  
XXX: Letters  
Useable memory is slightly less than the card capacity.  
Please confirm the latest information on the following website.  
Card  
(This site is in English only.)  
DCIM  
These folders are  
shown earlier in the  
Album View screen  
than other still picture  
folders.  
ꢅꢅꢅXXXXX  
If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary  
for recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a  
PC, you may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases,  
format the card on this unit (55, 78).  
This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card  
Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC  
Memory Cards in FAT32 format.  
SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be  
used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment.  
SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only  
compatible with SD Memory Cards.  
We recommend using a Panasonic SD card.  
This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures on an SD  
card.  
(Picture folder)  
XXXXꢅꢅꢅꢅ.JPG  
Any folder with JPEG files  
e.g.,  
001  
P0000001.JPG  
P0000001.JPG  
(MPEG2 folder)  
SD_VIDEO  
PRGꢅꢅꢅ  
Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent  
swallowing.  
MOVꢅꢅꢅ.MOD  
MOVꢅꢅꢅ.MOI  
PRGꢅꢅꢅ.PGI  
MGR_INFO  
(MPEG2 information folder)  
RQT9075  
13  
Regarding DivX files, MP3 files and still pictures (JPEG)  
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are  
applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]  
Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended  
formats) and Joliet  
DivX  
This unit is compatible with multi-session but reading or play of the  
disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.  
Operation may take time to complete when there are many files  
(tracks) and/or folders (groups) and some files (tracks) may not  
display or be playable.  
English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.  
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.  
The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is  
displayed on a computer.  
Playable  
media  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
File  
format  
DivX  
Files must have the  
extension “.DIVX”, “.divx”,  
“.AVI” or “.avi”.  
Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files  
(tracks) and folders (groups) may not play in the order you  
numbered them.  
This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.  
Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not play.  
Number  
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300 folders  
of folders (including the root folder)  
Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 200 files  
Number  
of files  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
Support  
version  
Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6)  
with standard playback of DivX media files.  
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.  
Video  
Number of stream: Up to 1  
Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50  
Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576  
FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps  
Audio  
Number of stream: Up to 8  
Format: MP3, MPEG, AC3  
Multi channel: AC3 is possible. MPEG multi is 2 ch  
conversion.  
Compatible formats: DCF§4 compliant (Content recorded on a  
digital camera, etc.)  
§4 Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established  
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries  
Association (JEITA).  
Structure of folders displayed by this unit  
You can play MP3 and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by  
making folders as shown below. However depending on the  
method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the  
order you numbered the folders.  
Structure of MP3 folders  
[CD] [USB]  
MP3  
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in  
Root  
the order you want to play  
Playable  
media  
[HDD] [CD] [USB]  
(folder=group)  
001  
them.  
(file=track)  
001track.mp3  
002track.mp3  
003track.mp3  
File  
format  
MP3  
Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.  
002 group  
Number  
Maximum number of folders (groups) recognizable:  
001track.mp3  
002track.mp3  
003track.mp3  
004track.mp3  
003 group  
of folders 300 folders (groups)  
(groups)  
(including the root folder)  
001track.mp3  
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1  
3000 files (tracks)  
:
Number  
of files  
(tracks)  
002track.mp3  
003track.mp3  
Order of play  
Bit rates  
32 kbps to 320 kbps  
Structures of still picture folders  
[CD] [USB]  
Files inside a folder are  
displayed in the order  
they were updated or  
taken.  
Sampling 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz  
frequency  
Root  
P0000001.jpg  
P0000002.jpg  
ID3 tags  
compatible ([HDD] [USB])  
002 Folder  
If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3 file,  
play may not be possible.  
P0000003.jpg  
P0000004.jpg  
P0000005.jpg  
Still pictures (JPEG§2  
)
003 Folder  
Playable  
media  
[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [USB]  
[SD]  
P0000006.jpg  
P0000007.jpg  
P0000008.jpg  
P0000009.jpg  
File  
format  
File format: JPEG  
Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.  
004 Folder  
P0000010.jpg  
P0000011.jpg  
P0000012.jpg  
Order of play  
Number  
of pixels  
Between 34k34 and 6144k4096  
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)  
[RAM]  
Number  
of  
[CD] [USB] Maximum number of folders  
recognizable:300 folders  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of  
300 folders  
The following  
can be displayed on this unit.  
folders§3  
¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters  
§1 Still pictures on the root  
folder can also be  
Root  
1
XXXXꢅꢅꢅꢅ.JPG  
displayed.  
JPEG  
Number  
of files§3  
[CD] [USB] Maximum number of files  
recognizable§1:3000 files  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of  
3000 files  
§2 Folders can be created  
on other equipment.  
However, these folders  
cannot be selected as a  
copying destination.  
If a folder name or file  
name has been input  
using other equipment,  
the name may not be  
displayed properly or you  
may not be able to play or  
edit the data.  
DCIMꢅꢅꢅ  
ꢅꢅꢅXXXXX  
XXXXꢅꢅꢅꢅ.JPG  
MOTION  
JPEG  
not supported  
2
DCIM  
§1 Total number of recognizable file including MP3, JPEG, DivX and  
other types of files is 4000.  
ꢅꢅꢅXXXXX  
XXXXꢅꢅꢅꢅ.JPG  
§2 It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.  
§3 When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not  
display or be playable.  
RQT9075  
14  
Media handling (Disc/USB memory/SD card)  
Disc and card care  
Inserting discs  
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.  
How to hold a disc or card  
Do not touch the recorded surface or the terminal surface.  
Cartridge disc  
Insert label-up with the arrow  
facing in.  
DO  
DO NOT  
d)  
Insert label-up.  
car  
/SD  
y
Concerning non-cartridge discs  
Be careful about scratches and dirt.  
Insert fully.  
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.  
emor  
If there is dirt or condensation on the disc  
Automatic drive select function  
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.  
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge set to  
“PROTECT” (54, Cartridge-protection)]  
[DVD-V] [VCD] [CD]  
USB  
/
DO  
DO NOT  
isc  
If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically  
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.  
If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is  
automatically selected.  
D
Handling precautions  
[Note]  
Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc  
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)  
Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt  
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.  
Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static  
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.  
Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.  
Do not expose the terminals of the card to water, garbage or other  
strange things.  
When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the disc  
from the cartridge.  
hadling(  
[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side  
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc  
and turn it over.  
[RAM] When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the  
protect position (54), play automatically starts when inserted in  
the unit.  
edia  
M
/
)
G
PE  
Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels  
(rental discs, etc.).  
Discs that are badly warped or cracked.  
J
(
Inserting, removing the USB memory  
Inserting the USB memory  
Before inserting any USB memory to  
this unit, ensure that the data stored  
therein has been backed up.  
es  
r
u
ct  
i
Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart  
shapes.  
p
DO NOT  
il  
Check the orientation of the USB  
connector and insert it straight in.  
Do not place in the following areas:  
In direct sunlight.  
In very dusty or humid areas.  
Near a heater.  
Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature  
(condensation can occur).  
Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.  
To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases  
or cartridges when you are not using them.  
Insert an USB device while the unit is  
stopped, so the “USB device” screen is  
displayed. Select an item and press  
[OK] to switch to the USB-related operations (28, 48).  
Removing the USB memory  
Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory  
straight out.  
andst  
iles  
f
3
P
If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may  
be damaged.  
s,M  
ile  
f
X
Inserting, removing the SD card [EH68]  
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no  
compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a  
problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no  
responsibility and offers no compensation for any  
subsequent damage caused by such loss.  
Examples of causes of such losses are  
When the card indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the  
card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or  
remove the card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the  
card’s contents.  
ngDiv  
d
Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.  
A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD  
Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another  
company.  
A disc used as described above and then played again in this  
unit.  
A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer  
disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this  
unit.  
Inserting the card  
Regar  
Press on the centre of the  
card until it clicks into  
place.  
If you are using a  
miniSD card or a  
microSD card, insert  
it into the adaptor  
that comes with the  
card.  
e.g., miniSD  
ADAPTER  
Insert and remove  
this adaptor from the  
unit.  
Insert the card label up with  
the cut-off corner on the right.  
Removing the card  
Press on the centre of the card.  
Pull it straight out.  
Automatic drive select function  
If you insert an SD card while the unit is stopped, the “SD Card”  
screen is displayed. Select an item and press [OK] to switch to the  
SD drive (28, 48).  
RQT9075  
If you remove an SD card, the HDD drive is automatically selected.  
15  
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs  
The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you  
Refer to “Advanced playback” (26) for detail  
information.  
may not always be able to control play as described in these  
operating instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.  
When playing back a title recorded on the HDD, ensure that you  
match the “TV System” setting to the recorded title (60).  
2
When a menu screen appears on the television  
[DVD-V]  
REC  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].  
Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.  
If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the menu  
screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].  
3
[VCD]  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [5]  
15:  
[1] [5]  
DVD  
TV  
B
To return to the menu screen  
B
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
[DVD-V]  
SELECT  
AV  
1
2
Press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].  
1
2 3  
1
CH  
[VCD]  
Numbered  
buttons  
Press [RETURN].  
4 5 6  
INPUT SELECT  
8 9  
7
[Note]  
G-Code  
DELETE  
-/--  
Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [] when  
you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your television  
screen and so on.  
0
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
3
TIME SLIP  
OK  
,,,ꢄ  
OK  
OPTION  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
F
Rec  
STATUS  
Preparation  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit  
the connections to this unit.  
Turn on this unit.  
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
HDD or DVD drive.  
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.  
2
If you selected the DVD drive  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main  
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.  
Press the button again to close the tray.  
3 Press [1] (PLAY).  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.  
[DVD-V] [VCD]  
Play starts from the point specified by the disc.  
[CD]  
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.  
Menu operation for other type of contents  
DivX (28)  
MP3 (29)  
Still pictures (JPEG) (30)  
Music on HDD (32)  
Music CD (32)  
[Note]  
During recording, or timer recording standby, this unit cannot play  
discs or titles that do not match the “TV System” (60) setting. It is  
recommended “TV System” be set to match the discs or title before  
playing them.  
Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen,  
pictures, sound, etc. to start.  
RQT9075  
16  
Recording television programmes  
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on  
disc. Data will not be overwritten.  
You cannot change the channel or recording mode during  
recording.  
Refer to “Important notes for recording” (20) and  
“Advanced recording” (21) for detail information.  
2
You can record while the unit is in standby for timer  
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to  
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and  
the timer recording will begin.  
s
REC  
[HDD] [RAM] When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”  
(58), you can change the audio being received by  
pressing [AUDIO] during recording. (Does not affect the  
recording of audio.)  
me  
a
ogr  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
3 5  
pr  
To pause recording  
on  
i
DVD  
Press [;].  
s
i
TV  
Press again to restart recording.  
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.  
(Title is not split into separate titles.)  
B
v
B
VOL  
CH  
le  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
e
t
AV  
1
To stop recording  
Press [].  
From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to  
complete recording management information after recording  
finishes.  
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R  
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary to  
finalise them (56).  
ng  
2 3  
1
i
CH  
Numbered  
buttons  
d
3
4 5 6  
or  
INPUT SELECT  
c
8 9  
0
7
G-Code  
DELETE  
/Re  
-/--  
s
c
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
is  
d
y
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
[USB] It is not possible to record on a USB memory.  
[SD] It is not possible to record on a card.  
TIME SLIP  
-onl  
y
Quick Start (61)  
pla  
1 Sec. Quick Start for Recording on DVD-RAM and HDD  
(When connecting to TV using 21-pin Scart, Component Video,  
Video or S Video terminals)  
OK  
ng  
i
y
OPTION  
RETURN  
From the power on, recording on DVD-RAM and HDD starts in  
about 1 second after the REC button is pressed. (Quick Start  
Mode)  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
/Pla  
AUDIO  
ts  
F
Rec  
STATUS  
n
“Quick Start” is set to “On” at the time of purchase.  
Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it may  
take time to display the screen.  
5
4
nte  
o
c
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
o
[Note]  
de  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.  
Startup takes up to a minute when:  
You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-  
RAM.  
You want to make other operations.  
The clock has not been set.  
i
v
d
e
Preparation  
d
r
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit  
the connections to this unit.  
o
c
e
Turn on this unit.  
r
To specify a time to stop recording—  
One Touch Recording  
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
ing  
y
HDD or DVD drive.  
a
l
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
P
During recording  
2
If you selected the DVD drive  
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select the recording  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main  
time.  
You can specify up to 4 hours later.  
The unit display changes as shown below.  
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00  
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.  
Press the button again to close the tray.  
^" Counter (cancel) ,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}  
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.  
This does not work during timer recordings (18, 24) or while  
using Flexible Recording (22).  
The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is  
reached.  
To select with the numbered buttons:  
To cancel  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [5]  
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter  
15:  
[1] [5]  
appears.  
The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording  
continues.  
4 Press [REC MODE] to select the  
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
Recording modes and approximate recording times (21)  
REC  
Remaining time  
on the disc  
To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):  
Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the  
Setup menu (59).  
5 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.  
RQT9075  
REC  
17  
Timer recording using G-CODE system [For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Refer to “Advanced timer recording” (24–25) for  
3 Press [OK].  
detail information.  
1:58 SP  
TUE 14.10.08. 12:54:00  
Timer  
Remain  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
[Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Recording  
HDD  
DVD  
Name  
Date  
Start  
19:00  
Stop  
20:00  
Mode  
SP  
DVD  
HDD  
TV  
1
ARD 15. 7.TUE  
BꢀDVD  
B
B
VOL  
CH  
CH  
DRIVE  
Programme Name  
SELECT  
AV  
Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV  
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using  
[3, 4, 2, 1] (24, step 3).  
When “-- ---” appears in the “Name” column, you cannot set  
timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired programme  
position. After you have entered the information of a TV  
station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.  
2 3  
1
2
4 5 6  
INPUT SELECT  
G-Code  
8 9  
0
7
DELETE  
-/--  
1
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
4 Press [OK].  
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is  
displayed.  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
TIME SLIP  
No. Name  
01  
3, 4  
OK  
Timer icon  
ARD  
OPTION  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
STATUS  
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording  
standby has been activated.  
F
Rec  
TUE 14.10.08 12:56:00  
Drive  
HDD  
space  
Mode  
SP  
Stop  
20:00  
DVD  
Check to make sure “OK”  
is displayed (25).  
HDD  
OK  
Programme  
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.  
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.  
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)  
To cancel recording when recording has already  
begun (24)  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.  
To release the unit from recording standby  
(24)  
Notes on timer recording (24)  
Preparation  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit  
the connections to this unit.  
If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording  
(15).  
Make sure that the clock settings are correct (61).  
G-CODE is a registered trademark of  
Gemstar Development Corporation. The  
G-CODE system is manufactured under  
license from Gemstar Development  
Corporation.  
Entering G-CODE numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You  
can find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers and magazines.  
1 Press [G-Code].  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
G-Code  
Record  
Remain  
TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00  
Input G-Code Number 0-9, and press OK.  
2 Press the numbered buttons to enter  
the G-CODE number.  
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.  
RQT9075  
18  
Deleting titles  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete  
DVD  
TV  
B
B
1
While stopped  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
DRIVE SELECT  
es  
l
t
i
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
t
g
CH  
press [OK].  
in  
INPUT SELECT  
8 9  
7
DELETE Navigator  
HDD  
Grouped Titles  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
MUSIC  
let  
G-Code  
DELETE  
-/--  
0
DELETE  
/D  
]
.
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
10.10.  
11.10.  
2
Z
.
, ꢉ  
N
]
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
3
TIME SLIP  
Previous  
Next  
Select Previous  
Page 02/02  
li]and  
OK  
EXIT  
Next  
OPTION  
a
RETURN  
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”  
button to select “VIDEO”.  
OK  
1
o]Austr  
[F  
OPTION  
RETURN  
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title  
2, 3, 4, 5  
m
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
and press [;].  
AUDIO  
REC  
DISPLAY  
REC MODE  
MANUAL SKIP  
e
t
“Red”  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all  
necessary items.  
F
Rec  
STATUS  
ys  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
DE  
To show other pages (Thumbnail Display only)  
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
CO  
gG-  
You can confirm the titles, that you have selected using the  
n
i
option menu.  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Title View” (36,  
step 4).  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)  
ingus  
d
r
4 Press [OK].  
A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain  
before proceeding.  
You cannot delete while recording or copying.  
o
c
e
r
5 Press [2] to select “Delete” and press  
r
[OK].  
Preparation  
me  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
[RAM] Release protection (54, Setting the protection).  
i
The title is deleted.  
T
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Available disc space after deleting  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
[HDD] [RAM] The space deleted becomes available for recording.  
Deleting during play  
Available disc space increases after  
deleting any of these titles  
1
While playing  
Press [DELETE ¢].  
Last title  
recorded  
Available  
disc space  
......  
Title  
Title  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and  
press [OK].  
The title is deleted.  
[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the  
last recorded title is deleted.  
Available disc space does  
not increase even after  
deleting  
Available disc space  
increases after deleting  
Last title Available disc  
......  
Title  
Title  
Title  
recorded  
space  
Later recorded  
titles  
Deleted  
Last title  
recorded  
Available  
disc space  
......  
This space become available for recording after all the later  
recorded titles are deleted.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even  
after the contents are deleted.  
RQT9075  
19  
Important notes for recording  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
When recording a  
bilingual programme  
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.  
You can change the audio during playback.  
(26, Changing audio during play)  
Select the main or secondary audio before  
recording  
(59, Bilingual Audio Selection)  
However in the following cases, select whether to  
record the main or secondary audio:  
Recording sound in LPCM (59, Audio Mode for  
XP Recording)  
Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The  
default setting is “On”. 58)  
M 1  
Hello  
The selected  
audio only is  
recorded.  
M 2  
M 1  
Hello  
Hallo  
If you record from external equipment  
Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external equipment.  
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”)  
[-R] [-RW‹V›]  
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”)  
The programme will be recorded in the original  
aspect.  
About the aspect when  
recording a programme  
If “Aspect for Recording” in the Setup menu is set to  
“Automatic” (The default setting is “Automatic” 58),  
the programme will be recorded in the original aspect  
used when recording started (including when  
recording started at a commercial, etc.). If recorded  
with a different aspect, select the correct aspect  
(“16:9” or “4:3”).  
[+R] [+RW]  
The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.  
However, in the following cases, programme will be  
recorded in 4:3.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR  
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording modes will  
be recorded in 4:3 aspect.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
When you want to copy  
titles in high speed  
mode from the HDD to  
DVD-R, etc.  
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.  
(The default setting is “On”. 58)  
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X§); however, the audio and aspect settings  
(above) are necessary before recording to the HDD.  
§
Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.  
Record to the HDD  
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.  
HDD  
It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW  
When recording the  
“One time only  
recording” broadcasts  
or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (78) compatible DVD-RAM.  
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
[HDD]  
(: Can do, –: Cannot do)  
“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They  
are deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.  
Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.  
You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Playing the disc on  
other DVD players  
The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (56).  
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play  
them as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record  
or copy.§  
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.  
Play on other DVD equipment  
Record to DVD-R, etc.  
Í
/I  
Í
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC  
1
2
3
4
5
;
1
:/6  
5/9  
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
<OPEN/CLOSE  
H
RC  
SEA  
R
ENTE  
V
O
L
A
Y
ISPL  
U
D
MEN  
OP  
T
URN  
RET  
NU  
O
N
ME  
OFF  
DC  
IN  
9V  
Finalise  
EN  
OP  
D
UN  
RO  
UR  
A.S  
E
EP  
EA  
T
R
MOD  
ITOR  
PIC  
MON  
E
M
ODE  
TUR  
[+RW]  
If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (56).  
Recording to DVD-R DL You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.  
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.  
and +R DL  
RQT9075  
It is not possible to record to both the HDD and the DVD drive simutaneously.  
20  
Advanced recording  
Recording modes and approximate recording times  
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.  
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)  
g
DVD-R DL§3  
(8.5 GB)  
+R DL§3  
(8.5 GB)  
Recording Mode  
HDD  
DVD-RAM  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
+R  
in  
d
r
[EH58]  
(250 GB)  
[EH68]  
(320 GB)  
Single-  
Double-  
sided§1  
(9.4 GB)  
sided  
+RW  
co  
(4.7 GB)  
(4.7 GB)  
re  
XP (High picture  
quality recording  
mode)  
55 hours  
71 hours  
1 hour  
2 hours  
1 hour  
1 hour 45 min.  
1 hour 45 min.  
ed  
c
n
a
v
SP (Standard  
110 hours  
221 hours  
441 hours  
142 hours  
284 hours  
567 hours  
2 hours  
4 hours  
4 hours  
8 hours  
2 hours  
4 hours  
3 hours 35 min.  
7 hours 10 min.  
3 hours 35 min.  
7 hours 10 min.  
Ad  
/
recording mode)  
g
in  
LP (Long  
recording mode)  
d
r
EP (Extra long  
8 hours  
16 hours  
8 hours  
14 hours 20 min.  
eco  
recording mode)§4 (331hours§2  
)
(426hours§2  
)
(6 hours§2  
)
(12 hours§2  
)
(6 hours§2  
)
(10 hours 45 min.§2  
)
r
o
f
FR (Flexible  
Recording  
Mode)§4  
441 hours  
maximum  
567 hours  
maximum  
8 hours  
maximum  
8 hours  
8 hours  
maximum  
14 hours 20 min.  
Approximately  
9 hours with video  
quality equivalent  
to LP mode.  
maximum  
es  
t
for one side  
o
n
t
§1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.  
§2 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP (6 Hours)” in the Setup menu (58).  
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than when using “EP (8 Hours)”.  
n
a
t
r
o
p
§3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.  
m
I
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
§4 When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW  
discs.  
[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.  
Use “EP (6 Hours)” mode if playback may be on other equipment.  
[HDD]  
You can record up to 499 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]  
You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.  
[+R] [+RW]  
You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.  
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)  
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.  
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP (8 Hours) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with  
the best possible recording quality.  
For example with a 90 minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.  
When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.  
All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.  
REC  
When removing a recorded disc  
When the format confirmation screen is  
displayed  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc  
for play on other equipment.  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or  
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format  
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.  
Finalise  
Finalise the disc so that it can be played  
on other DVD players.  
Format  
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible  
after finalising. This may take up to min.  
This disc is not formatted properly.  
Do you want to format the disc now ?  
Press the REC button to start finalise.  
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.  
The disc cannot be played on other  
DVD players without finalising.  
Yes  
No  
SELECT  
To finalise the disc  
RETURN  
OK  
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
You cannot stop this process once you have started it.  
If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a  
disc name, select “Top Menu” (56), “Auto-Play Select” (56) or  
“Disc Name” (54) in “DVD Management” before finalising.  
To format a disc  
“Deleting all the contents—Format” (55)  
To open the tray without disc finalisation  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.  
RQT9075  
21  
Advanced recording  
3
When you want to start recording  
Flexible Recording  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”  
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)  
and press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording  
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR  
mode.  
Recording starts.  
XP  
SP  
LP  
EP  
All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in  
the display.  
Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these  
kinds of situations.  
To exit the screen without recording  
e.g., HDD  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
Press [RETURN].  
Remaining  
time of  
recording  
When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an  
appropriate recording mode difficult  
When you want to record a long programme with the best picture  
quality possible  
HDD  
REC 0:59  
ARD  
M 1 / M 2  
L R  
To stop recording partway  
Press [].  
To show the remaining time  
Press [STATUS].  
[HDD]  
When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be  
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly  
You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording  
mode when copying, to fit the disc space.  
Playing while you are recording  
[HDD] [RAM]  
e.g., Recording a 90 minute programme to disc  
Playing from the beginning of the title you are  
recording—Chasing playback  
If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.  
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.  
If you try to record a 90 minute  
programme in XP mode, only the first  
60 minutes will fit on the disc and the  
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
30 minute balance will not get  
recorded.  
Another disc is necessary.  
To stop play  
Press [].  
To stop recording  
2 seconds after play stops, press [].  
To stop timer recording  
2 seconds after play stops  
If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.  
1
2
Press [].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].  
However there will be 30 minutes  
remaining disc space.  
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—  
Simultaneous rec and play  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press  
[DRIVE SELECT].  
If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc  
perfectly.  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during  
recording.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
and press [OK].  
There is no sound output while searching forward or  
backward.  
Necessary space for recording  
To stop play  
Preparation  
Press [].  
Select the channel or the external input to record.  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
To exit the Direct Navigator screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
1
While stopped  
To stop recording  
After play stops  
Press [F Rec].  
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.  
If the recording is on the other drive  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.  
Press [].  
Flexible Rec  
Maximum recording time  
This is the maximum recording  
time in EP (8 Hours) mode.  
Record in FR mode.  
Maximum rec. time 8 Hour 00 Min.  
Set rec. time  
3
8 Hour 00 Min.  
Start  
Cancel  
To stop timer recording  
After play stops  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and  
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.  
If the recording is on the other drive  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive.  
Press [].  
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the  
recording time.  
3
4
You can also set the recording time with the numbered  
buttons.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].  
You cannot record more than 8 hours.  
[Note]  
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be  
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).  
RQT9075  
22  
Copying from a video cassette recorder  
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front  
You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.  
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.  
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes  
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at  
each break in the images and the playlist is created automatically.  
REC  
er  
d
r
Preparation  
This unit  
1
Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the  
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (left).  
Turn on the main unit.  
eco  
r
VIDEO L/MONO - AUDIO- R  
S
VIDEO  
DV IN  
e
t
2
AV3 IN  
When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,  
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (60).  
Yellow White Red  
set  
1 Turn on the DV equipment, and pause  
play at the point you want recording to  
cas  
DV cable  
(IEEE 1394, 4-pin)  
o
e
S Video  
cable§  
Audio/Video  
cable  
d
start.  
avi  
The following screen appears.  
Other video equipment  
m
DV Auto Rec  
o
r
DV unit is connected.  
Record from the DV unit?  
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.  
f
g
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural  
in  
y
p
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.  
Rec to HDD  
Rec to DVD  
Cancel  
§
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the  
SELECT  
Co  
VIDEO terminal.  
RETURN  
OK  
/
g
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal  
When the screen is not displayed  
in  
Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”  
in the Setup menu (59).  
d
r
After performing step 1  
1
2
3
4
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec” and press [OK].  
Go to step 3 (below)  
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder),  
you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape only.  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (58) is set to “On” and you  
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected  
in “Aspect for Recording” (58) of the Setup menu.  
eco  
r
ced  
n
a
v
About the aspect when recording a programme (20)  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to HDD”  
[Note]  
Ad  
If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the  
recording will start and the copying will stop.  
If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then  
the video quality will be degraded.  
or “Rec to DVD” and press [OK].  
3 Press [REC MODE] to select the  
recording mode.  
Manual recording  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.  
When recording bilingual programmes (20, Important notes for  
recording)  
When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,  
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (60).  
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have  
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can  
be recorded onto the HDD.)  
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec” and  
press [OK].  
Recording starts.  
When recording finishes  
The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK] to finish DV automatic  
recording.  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
[Note]  
To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “Input  
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (53).  
Check the time on the unit is correct.  
Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder) can  
be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.  
It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.  
The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It  
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)  
The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.  
Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be  
input properly.  
The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will  
not be recorded.  
You cannot record and play simultaneously.  
1
While stopped  
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the  
input channel for the equipment you  
have connected.  
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select “A3”.  
2 Start play on the other equipment.  
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,  
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the  
unit off and back on.  
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual  
recording (left).  
3
When you want to start recording  
Press [¥ REC].  
Recording starts.  
To skip unwanted parts  
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated  
to prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so  
treated cannot be recorded using this unit.  
Using Flexible Recording (22), you can record the content of a  
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best  
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.  
RQT9075  
23  
Advanced timer recording  
To cancel recording when recording  
has already begun  
Manually programming timer  
recordings  
1
While the unit is on  
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
recording drive and press [].  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Timer  
Remain  
Recording  
TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00  
HDD  
Drive  
No. Name  
01  
Date  
15. 7. TUE  
Start Stop  
20:00  
DVD Mode  
space  
Stop Recording  
HDD  
19:00  
SP  
OK  
ARD  
New Timer Programme  
Timer recording in progress.  
Stop this timer recording?  
It will be cancelled if you stop.  
Cancel  
Stop Recording  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
Programme” and press [OK].  
3 Press [1] to move through the items  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop  
and change the items with [3, 4].  
Recording” and press [OK].  
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if  
you have set a weekly or daily timer recording, the recording  
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.  
1:58 SP  
TUE 14.10.08. 12:54:00  
Timer  
Remain  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Recording  
HDD  
Name  
Date  
Start  
22:00  
Stop  
22:30  
Mode  
DVD  
HDD SP  
1
ARD 15. 7. TUE  
To release the unit from recording  
standby  
Programme Name  
Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and  
Stop (Finish time) in 30-minute increments.  
You can also set Name (Programme position/TV Station  
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with  
the numbered buttons.  
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording  
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].  
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].  
Date  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme  
[. Date:  
Current date up to one month later minus  
one day  
l
;:  
and press the “Red” button.  
l
Daily timer:  
;:  
SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI  
The timer icon “F” (25) disappears from the timer  
recording list.  
l
a.  
You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as  
even one timer icon “F” (25) remains in the timer  
recording list.  
Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording  
standby.  
Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT  
Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are  
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the Direct Navigator  
screen (27) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.  
You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording  
drive.  
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough  
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the  
“HDD” (25, Relief Recording).  
Notes on timer recording  
When a timer recording is set, DVDs that were recorded using a  
different TV system cannot be played unless the TV system is  
changed in the Setup menu (60) or the timer recording has  
completed or has been cancelled.  
Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is  
turned on/off.  
Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when  
playing.  
You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording  
mode.  
[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (25)  
ON!)OFF  
Programme Name  
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK].  
(42, Entering text)  
Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal  
speed mode (43).  
4 Press [OK].  
If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains  
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.  
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.  
If the unit is not put in the timer recording standby mode at the last  
10 minutes before the programmed timer recording starting time,  
the “F” flashes on the unit’s display.  
When you programme successive timer recordings to start  
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at  
the beginning of the later programmes.  
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is displayed.  
No. Name  
Timer icon  
01  
ARD  
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording  
standby has been activated.  
Programme  
Programme  
Not recorded  
Recorded  
Recorded  
TUE 14.10.08 12:56:00  
Drive  
HDD  
space  
OK  
Mode  
SP  
If the actual broadcasting times of timer recordings overlap, the  
recording that starts first always has priority, and the recording of  
the later programme will start only after the first timer recording has  
finished.  
Stop  
20:00  
Programme  
DVD  
Check to make sure “OK”  
HDD  
is displayed (25).  
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.  
Press [Í DVD] to turn the unit off.  
RQT9075  
24  
Check, change or delete a programme  
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer  
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].  
Relief Recording  
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough  
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If  
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when  
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be  
altered to the HDD.  
g
Press [PROG/CHECK].  
in  
d
r
Icons  
The Direct Navigator shows which programmes were relief-  
co  
F
[
Timer recording standby is activated.  
This programme is currently recording.  
recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (27).  
If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the  
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.  
re  
The times overlap those in another programme.  
Recording of the programme with the later start time  
starts when the earlier programme finishes recording.  
me  
i
t
Auto Renewal Recording  
[HDD]  
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every  
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme  
over the old one.  
This function can be used only when weekly recording or daily  
recording is selected.  
You stopped a weekly or daily timer recording. The icon  
disappears the next time the timer programme starts  
recording.  
ced  
n
a
v
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.  
Ad  
The programme was copy-protected so it was not  
recorded.  
The programme did not complete recording because  
the disc is dirty or some other reason.  
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording  
(right).  
X
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme  
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD  
(Displayed while recording.)  
and press [OK].  
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD  
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”  
column.  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press  
1:58 SP  
TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00  
Timer  
Remain  
Date  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Recording  
[OK].  
HDD  
Start Stop DVD  
Drive  
Mode  
No. Name  
space  
1:58 SP  
Timer  
Remain  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
New Timer Programme  
Recording  
TUE 14.10.08. 12:53:00  
HDD  
DVD  
RENEW  
ON  
Name  
Date  
SUN  
Start  
22:00  
Stop  
Mode  
SP  
1
ARD  
22:30 HDD  
Programme Name  
Press OK to store new programme.  
OK  
[Note]  
RETURN  
If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or  
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the  
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for  
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this  
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto  
Renewal Recording takes place.  
Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal  
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.  
When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may  
not be recorded completely.  
Message displayed in the “Drive space” line  
OK:  
Displayed if the recording can fit in the  
remaining space.  
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display  
will show until when recordings can be made (up  
to a maximum of one month from the present  
time) based on the time remaining on the disc.  
! :  
It may not be possible to record because:  
there is not enough space left  
the number of possible titles has reached its  
maximum.  
Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to  
the HDD.  
To change a programme  
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (24,  
step 3)  
To delete a programme  
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢].  
You can also delete a programme with the following steps  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
To exit the timer recording list  
Press [PROG/CHECK].  
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer  
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.  
RQT9075  
25  
Advanced playback  
While paused, press [2] (2;)  
Frame-by-  
frame  
Operation during play  
Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.  
or [1] (;1).  
Each press shows the next frame.  
Press and hold to change in succession  
forward or backward.  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]  
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW]  
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
[VCD]  
Press [].  
Stop  
The stopped position is memorized.  
Resume play function  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this  
position.  
1 Press [TIME SLIP].  
Skipping the  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the  
specified time  
Stopped position  
time and press [OK].  
If [] is pressed several times, the  
position is cleared in some cases.  
The position is cleared if the tray is  
opened.  
(Time Slip)  
Play skips the specified time.  
Each time you press [3, 4], the time  
increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1  
minute intervals. (Press and hold for  
10-minute intervals.)  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-R] [-R]DL]  
[-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL]  
(This function does  
not work with  
finalised discs.)  
[CD] [VCD] and MP3/DivX :The position is  
cleared if the unit is turned off.  
This automatically disappears after  
approximately 5 seconds. To show the  
screen again press [TIME SLIP] again.  
Press [;].  
Pause  
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart  
play.  
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
-
5 min  
Press [6] or [5].  
The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Audio is heard during first level search  
forward.  
Search  
[CD] and MP3 : Audio is heard during all  
levels of search.  
DivX : Audio is not heard during all  
levels of search.  
Press [MANUAL SKIP].  
Each time you press, play restarts  
approximately 1 minute later.  
Manual Skip  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-R] [-R]DL]  
[-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL]  
(This function does  
not work with  
finalised discs.)  
During play or while paused,  
Skip  
press [:] or [9].  
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want  
to play.  
Each press increases the number of  
skips.  
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
DivX : Press [:] to return to the  
beginning of the title currently playing.  
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].  
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.  
Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a  
chapter.  
Create  
Chapter  
Press the numbered buttons.  
Play starts from the selected title, chapter  
or track.  
Starting from  
a selected title  
(36, Title/Chapter)  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[HDD]  
e.g.,  
Changing audio during play  
Press [AUDIO].  
5: [0] [0] [5]  
15: [0] [1] [5]  
MP3 and JPEG  
e.g.,  
5: [0] [0] [0] [5]  
15: [0] [0] [1] [5]  
Other discs  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX  
LR>L>R  
^---------------}  
Input a 2-digit number  
e.g.,  
HDD  
PLAY  
5: [0] [5]  
15: [1] [5]  
This works only when  
stopped (the screen  
L R  
on the right is displayed on the  
television) with some discs.  
[VCD] (with playback control)  
If you press the numbered buttons while  
stopped (the above screen is displayed  
on the television) you can cancel PBC.  
(Elapsed play time appears on the unit’s  
display.)  
e.g., “L R” is selected  
[DVD-V]  
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the  
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack  
language (52, Soundtrack).  
1 ENG  
CꢀDigital 3/2.1ch  
Soundtrack  
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/  
Quick View  
e.g., English is selected.  
a1.3).  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Play speed is quicker than normal.  
Press again to return to normal speed.  
[Note]  
While paused, press [6] or  
[5].  
Slow-motion  
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.  
When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R  
DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.  
When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP  
Recording” is set to “LPCM” (59).  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting  
is “On” 58).  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]  
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW]  
[DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
[VCD]  
The speed increases up to 5 steps.  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.  
The unit will pause if slow-motion play is  
continued for approximately 5 minutes  
(excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).  
RQT9075  
26  
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—Direct Navigator  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them. You can  
also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles.  
All Titles screen  
Displays all titles.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
All Titles  
VIDEO  
009  
PICTURE  
MUSIC  
007  
008  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
r
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
- - -  
ARD 11.10. SAT  
- - -  
ARD 18.10. SAT  
o
t
- - -  
button to select “VIDEO”.  
a
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title  
vig  
Previous  
Next  
Page 02/02  
Na  
OK  
and press [OK].  
Select Previous  
Next  
OPTION  
RETURN  
t
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons (All Titles  
screen only).  
(in Thumbnail Display)  
irec  
e.g., [HDD]  
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
To sort the titles for easy searching  
[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only)  
—D  
y
5:  
[0] [0] [5]  
5:  
[0] [5]  
a
l
15: [0] [1] [5]  
115: [1] [1] [5]  
15: [1] [5]  
p
o
t
This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback  
from many titles.  
1 Press [OPTION].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
If you select an item other than “No.”  
To show other pages  
es)  
l
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].  
(Thumbnail Display only)  
t
i
t
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
The Direct Navigator screen will reappear after playback of the  
selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)  
Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being  
played back.  
If you exit the Direct Navigator screen, or switch to another  
Direct Navigator screen, the sort will be cancelled.  
mes(  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
am  
r
g
Direct Navigator screen icons  
o
r
[
Currently recording.  
Title protected.  
p
ed  
To play grouped titles [HDD]  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OK].  
d
r
Title that was not recorded due to recording  
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)  
eco  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press [OK].  
t
Title cannot be played  
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is  
damaged etc.]  
r
g
n
i
t
To edit the group of titles [HDD]  
[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)  
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD  
(25, Relief Recording)  
lec  
Title with “One time only recording” restriction (78,  
/S  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title or a group and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all  
necessary titles.  
k
c
a
CPRM)  
Groups of titles ([HDD] only)  
b
y
Press [;] to cancel.  
a
l
2 Press [OPTION].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press  
Title that was recorded but has not yet been played  
Create Group  
p
([HDD] only)  
d
e
c
Release Grouping  
[OK].  
Title recorded using a different encoding system  
(NTSC)  
(PAL)  
from that of the TV system currently selected on the  
n
a
v
Create Group:  
Press [2, 1] to select “Create” and press [OK].  
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.  
unit.  
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit  
d
A
(60).  
Release Grouping:  
Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK].  
When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group  
are released.  
When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from  
the group.  
Switching the Direct Navigator  
appearance  
“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD]  
“Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”  
Regarding the group name  
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.  
1 While the Direct Navigator screen is displayed  
Press [OPTION].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles  
HDD  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles  
HDD  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
MUSIC  
VIDEO  
e.g.,  
10.10.  
Chantal Show  
11.10.  
Dolphines  
2
ARD 11.10. SAT  
Dolphines  
ARD 18.10. SAT  
Dolphines  
Table Display  
Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display”  
All Titles  
“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]  
PICTURE/MUSIC  
Previous  
Next  
Select Previous  
Previous  
Next  
Page 02/02  
Page 01/01  
OK  
OK  
Select  
Next  
OPTION  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
Grouped Titles screen  
Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly timer recording mode  
are bundled and displayed as one item.  
To change the group name  
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Name” and press [OK].  
Enter the name. (42, Entering text)  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
MUSIC  
HDD  
Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will  
not be changed.  
10.10.  
Chantal Show  
11.10.  
Dolphines  
2
Previous  
Next  
Select Previous  
Page 02/02  
OK  
RETURN  
Next  
OPTION  
(in Thumbnail Display)  
Select the item marked with  
bundled titles.  
and press [OK] to display the  
RQT9075  
27  
Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures  
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are  
applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.  
Playing DivX video contents  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
Showing the menu screen  
[CD]  
You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.  
1
2
Insert the disc.  
If the disc contains different file types  
1 Show DivX Menu screen.  
Playback  
(left, Showing the menu screen)  
Play Mode:DivX  
Select file type.  
Folder1  
:
00025  
DivX Menu  
CD (DivX)  
No.  
001  
Name of Title  
Tree  
DivX  
JPEG  
MP3  
ABC.avi  
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
Otherwise,  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Page  
001/001  
Total Title : 001  
OK  
RETURN  
Files are treated as titles.  
[USB] [SD]  
1 Insert the USB memory or the SD card.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and  
USB device  
SD Card  
press [OK].  
Play Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy Pictures (JPEG)  
Play starts on the selected title.  
Play Video (DivX)  
Play Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy Pictures (JPEG)  
Play Music (MP3)  
You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [0] [5]  
SELECT  
15:  
[0] [1] [5]  
Copy Music (MP3)  
RETURN  
OK  
Update CD database on HDD  
SELECT  
To stop playing  
Press [].  
RETURN  
OK  
2
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9].  
Changing the file type to play  
[CD] [USB]  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
1 Press [RETURN] several times to exit the menu.  
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
[Note]  
Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from  
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to  
adjust the aspect through the TV.  
FUNCTION MENU  
CD(DivX/JPEG/MP3)  
Play Mode : DivX  
Playback  
Successive play is not possible.  
Recording  
Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive  
or the DVD drive.  
Copy  
To Others  
OK  
Using the tree screen to find a folder  
RETURN  
1 While the file list is displayed  
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display  
the tree screen.  
3 [CD]  
Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press  
[OK].  
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.  
[USB]  
Folder  
DivX Menu  
CD (DivX)  
F
1/21  
1Press [3, 4] to select “To Others” and press  
12.02.2004  
Image001  
Image002  
Image003  
Image004  
Image005  
Image006  
Image007  
Image008  
Image009  
Image010  
DATA1  
[OK].  
2Press [3, 4] to select “USB device” and  
You cannot select folders  
that contain no compatible  
files.  
press [OK].  
DATA2  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
OK  
RETURN  
2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [OK].  
The file list for the folder appears.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
RQT9075  
28  
Regarding DivX VOD content  
Using the tree screen to find a group  
DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content is encrypted for copyright  
protection. In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first  
need to register the unit.  
Follow the on line instructions for purchasing DivX VOD content to  
enter the unit’s registration code and register the unit. For more  
1 While the file list is displayed  
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display  
the tree screen.  
Selected group No. /Total groups  
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.  
ures  
ct  
i
Display the unit’s registration code.  
(61, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)  
p
MP3 Menu  
Tree  
CD  
MP3 music  
il  
G
8
G
7/25  
T
14  
001 My favorite  
DivX Registration  
Setup  
001 Brazilian pops  
002 Chinese pops  
003 Czech pops  
004 Hungarian pops  
005 Liner notes  
006 Japanese pops  
007 Mexican pops  
008 Philippine pops  
009 Swedish pops  
001 Momoko  
TOTAL  
40/111  
DivX (R) Video On Demand  
Number  
You cannot select  
groups that contain no  
compatible files.  
andst  
Tuning  
0
9
8 alphanumeric characters  
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX  
3
P
Disc  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
SELECT  
OK  
002 Standard number  
001 Piano solo  
002 Vocal  
,M  
RETURN  
Connection  
Others  
OK  
RETURN  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press  
After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another  
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not  
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you  
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the  
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content  
that you purchased using the previous code.  
[OK].  
ngDivX  
The file list for the group appears.  
y
a
l
P
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code  
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this  
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)  
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of  
times  
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.  
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is  
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of  
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)  
When playing this content  
The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if  
– you press [Í DVD].  
– you press [].  
– you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
– you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content  
or the start of the content being played.  
– timer recording starts on the HDD.  
– you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.  
Resume functions do not work.  
Playing MP3 files  
[CD] [USB]  
You can play MP3 files recorded with a computer onto a CD-R/CD-  
RW and USB memory.  
You cannot play MP3 files on the USB memory while recording or  
copying.  
1 Show MP3 Menu screen.  
(28, Showing the menu screen)  
Selected group  
No.  
Group  
My favorite  
MP3 Menu  
CD  
G: Group No.  
1
Total  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
:
G
1
Track  
Tree  
T: Track No. in the group  
TOTAL:  
T
1
001 Both Ends Freezing  
TOTAL  
002 Lady Starfish  
003 Life on Jupiter  
004 Metal Glue  
005 Paint It Yellow  
006 Pyjamamama  
007 Shrimps from Mars  
008 Starperson  
1/111  
Track No./Total tracks in all  
groups  
Number  
0
9
Prev.  
Next  
8
SELECT  
9
10  
009 Velvet Cuppermine  
010 Ziggy Starfish  
OK  
RETURN  
Page 001/024  
Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and  
press [OK].  
Play starts on the selected track.  
0” indicates the track currently playing.  
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [0] [0] [5]  
15:  
[0] [0] [1] [5]  
To stop playing  
Press [].  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
RQT9075  
29  
Playing DivX, MP3 and still pictures  
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are  
applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.  
Regarding Album View screen  
Still pictures copied from USB memories and SD cards are grouped  
by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.  
You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (40).  
Playing still pictures  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Grouped by date  
[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [USB] [SD]  
You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a CD-R/  
CD-RW and USB memory.  
002  
You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.  
Inserting, removing the SD card [EH68] (15)  
Total 68  
Date: 10.10. 2007  
1 Show Album View screen.  
Number of pictures/Shooting date  
[CD] [USB] [SD]  
(28, Showing the menu screen)  
[HDD] [RAM] [CD] [USB] [SD]  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Album  
While stopped  
002  
1
2
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green”  
button to select “PICTURE”.  
10.10. 07  
Total 24  
Zoological park  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View  
HDD  
Album View screen  
MUSIC  
VIDEO  
- - -  
PICTURE  
Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name  
001  
002  
Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC  
etc., the information about the recording date may not be  
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].  
Regarding Album View  
screen right  
Total  
Date: 1. 1.2006  
5
Total  
Date: 1. 2.2006  
3
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
Page 01/01  
OPTION  
Previous  
Next  
OK  
Press OK to show  
pictures.  
Slide Show  
RETURN  
Direct Navigator screen icons  
Picture and folder protected.  
Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
album and press [OK].  
You can also select album with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [0] [5]  
15: [0] [1] [5]  
115: [1] [1] [5]  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View  
HDD  
PICTURE  
e.g., HDD  
Album Name 103__DVD  
0001  
0005  
0009  
0002  
0006  
----  
0003  
0007  
----  
0004  
0008  
----  
Page 001/001  
Previous  
Next  
OK  
Slide Show  
OPTION  
RETURN  
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still  
picture and press [OK].  
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [0] [0] [5]  
115: [0] [1] [1] [5]  
15: [0] [0] [1] [5]  
1115: [1] [1] [1] [5]  
Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.  
Useful functions during still picture play (31)  
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View  
screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
RQT9075  
30  
Useful functions during still picture play  
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.  
Start Slide Show  
While the Album View screen is displayed  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.  
2 Press [1] (PLAY).  
Slide Show Setting  
ures  
ct  
i
You can also start Slide Show with the following steps.  
While the Album View screen is displayed  
p
Start Slide Show  
il  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [OPTION].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slide Show” and press [OK].  
Slide Show Setting  
To change the display interval  
andst  
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval”.  
Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (0–30 seconds) and press [OK].  
3
P
,M  
Repeat Play  
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Slide Show Setting” in step 2 and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play”.  
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off” and press [OK].  
ngDivX  
While playing  
1 Press [OPTION].  
Rotate  
y
a
l
Rotate RIGHT  
P
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and  
Rotate LEFT  
OK  
press [OK].  
RETURN  
Rotation information will not be stored.  
[CD] [USB] Still pictures  
When disc or album is protected  
When played on other equipment  
When copying pictures  
When changing date  
If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed, picture rotation  
information may not be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
screen.  
While playing  
1 Press [OPTION].  
Zoom in  
Zoom out  
Rotate RIGHT  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].  
Rotate LEFT  
To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and  
press [OK].  
Zoom in  
OK  
RETURN  
When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.  
The enlargement information will not be stored.  
The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than 640 a 480 pixels.  
While playing  
e.g., HDD  
Properties  
18:53:50 11.10.  
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006  
Press [STATUS] twice.  
Date  
1. 1. 2005  
No.  
3 / 9  
To exit the picture properties screen  
Press [STATUS].  
Shooting date  
RQT9075  
31  
Playing music  
MP3  
e.g.,  
5:  
To play music CD  
[0] [0] [0] [5]  
115: [0] [1] [1] [5]  
15: [0] [0] [1] [5]  
1115: [1] [1] [1] [5]  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
To return to the previous screen  
1 Insert a music CD.  
Press [RETURN].  
The menu is automatically displayed.  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
CD  
[Note]  
Play Music  
Copy Music  
You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.  
When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while  
the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed. To  
return to the previous screen, press [OK].  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”  
Useful functions during music play  
Operations during play  
and press [OK].  
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database (50)  
and searches for the title information.  
Press [].  
Stop  
The stopped position is memorized.  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this  
position.  
P O W E R E D B Y  
If [] is pressed several times, the  
position is cleared.  
The position is cleared if the unit is  
turned off.  
Press [;].  
Pause  
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart  
play.  
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found  
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].  
Press [6] or [5].  
Search  
The speed increases up to 5 steps.  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
press [OK].  
During play or while paused, press  
[:] or [9].  
Skip to the track you want to play.  
Each press increases the number of  
skips.  
Skip  
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [5]  
15: [1] [5]  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Playback continues.  
You can select the item which you want to  
repeat.  
Repeat Play  
[HDD]  
While playing  
1
2
Press [OPTION].  
To play music recorded on HDD  
Copying music to HDD (50)  
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play  
Setting” and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select the item and  
press [OK].  
3
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.  
Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.  
You can change the order of the Album  
View (CD)/Group View (MP3)  
alphabetically.  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Sort  
[HDD]  
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to  
select “MUSIC”.  
While Album View (CD) screen or Group  
View (MP3) screen is displayed  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play CD on  
1
2
Press [OPTION].  
HDD” or “Play MP3 on HDD” and  
press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and  
press [OK].  
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Album Name”  
or “Group Name” and press [OK].  
Play Music  
Please select music to play.  
To cancel the sorted screen  
Press [3, 4] to select “No.” and press  
[OK].  
Play CD on HDD  
Play MP3 on HDD  
SELECT  
While Track View (CD) screen or Track  
View (MP3) screen is displayed  
RETURN  
OK  
Properties  
[HDD] [CD]  
1
2
Press [OPTION].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the album/  
Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”  
and press [OK].  
group and press [OK].  
You can also select the album/group with the numbered  
To exit the Properties screen, press  
[OK].  
buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] [0] [5]  
15: [0] [1] [5]  
115: [1] [1] [5]  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the track and  
press [OK].  
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.  
CD  
e.g.,  
RQT9075  
5:  
[0] [5]  
32  
15: [1] [5]  
Convenient functions  
To pause the TV programme you are  
watching—Pause Live TV  
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s  
tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is  
useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.  
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme  
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.  
FUNCTION MENU window  
By using the FUNCTION MENU window you may access the main  
functions quickly and easily.  
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
ons  
i
t
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of  
disc.  
unc  
FUNCTION MENU  
1 Turn on the television and select the  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
ntf  
e
i
Playback  
appropriate AV input to suit the  
connections to this unit.  
Recording  
n
e
v
Delete  
Copy  
n
o
To Others  
OK  
2 Turn on this unit and press [W X CH]  
C
/
RETURN  
c
i
to select the channel.  
s
u
3
When you want to pause the TV programme  
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and  
Press [;].  
press [OK].  
ingm  
y
HDD  
If you select “To Others” and press [OK], the following  
screen appears. Press [3, 4] to select an item and press  
[OK].  
ARD  
Pla  
L
R
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
Playback  
G-Code Record  
Advanced Copy  
Playlists  
Recording  
Delete  
Copy  
Flexible Rec  
DV Auto Rec  
Setup  
This icon indicates that Pause Live TV is working. You can  
turn off this icon (59, Pause Live TV Icon).  
To Others  
OK  
HDD Management  
RETURN  
4
When you want to resume  
Press [1] (PLAY)  
If you press [RETURN], you can return to the previous  
The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording mode  
(21) regardless of the recording mode and the drive  
selected before starting saving.  
screen.  
Playback  
You can select and play recorded  
programmes (16, 27), change the Play  
Mode (DivX, JPEG, MP3) (28), etc.  
At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be  
temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending on  
the HDD free space.)  
Recording  
Delete  
You can start programming timer  
Operation during Pause Live TV  
recording (24).  
Press [6, 5].  
Search  
Pause  
You can delete items using DELETE  
Navigator (19, 41).  
Press [;].  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.  
Copy  
You can copy recorded titles using COPY  
Navigator (44).  
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).  
Press again to return to the normal speed.  
Quick View  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
G-Code Record  
You can make timer recording setting by  
entering G-CODE numbers (18).  
While paused, press [6] or  
Slow-  
motion  
[5].  
Advanced Copy  
You can make a copy list and then copy  
(45).  
The speed increases up to 5 steps.  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
[EH68]  
You can copy the new still pictures on an  
1 Press [].  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”  
and press [OK].  
Stop Pause  
Live TV  
Copy New Pictures SD card (48).  
Playlists  
You can create playlists by grouping your  
favourite chapters (38).  
[Note]  
Flexible Rec  
The unit sets the best possible picture  
quality that fits the recording within the  
remaining disc space (22).  
The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer  
recording starts.  
The Pause Live TV function does not work if the clock is not set.  
The Pause Live TV function does not work  
while recording  
DV Auto Rec  
Setup  
DV automatic recording function (23)  
You can change the unit’s settings using  
Setup menu (57).  
while timer recording, etc.  
You cannot change audio during resume play.  
The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is  
full or the saving lasts 8 hours.  
HDD Management  
DVD Management  
You can manage the HDD, discs and  
cards through formatting, finalising and  
other operations (54).  
The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after  
started.  
[EH68]  
Card Management  
Copy Music CD  
You can start copying music CD to the  
HDD (50).  
USB device  
This unit displays the menu to help you  
start USB operations (28).  
“USB device” appears when a  
compatible USB device is connected.  
To exit the FUNCTION MENU window  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
RQT9075  
33  
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)  
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “HDAVI Control”.  
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?  
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or  
receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating  
instructions for connected equipment for operational details.  
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC  
(Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’  
equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.  
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” function.  
“HDAVI Control 3” is the newest standard (current as of December, 2007) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment. This  
standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI equipment.  
Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’ equipment supporting VIERA Link function.  
Preparation  
1
2
3
Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable (9) or to your receiver using an HDMI cable (64).  
Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (60). (The default setting is “On”.)  
Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment (e.g., TV).  
Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be used as “HDAVI Control”.  
4
Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI Control”  
function works properly.  
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.  
What you can do with “HDAVI Control”  
When you connect the unit to a TV for the first time, the station list data is automatically copied from the TV  
Download from the TV  
to the unit and the TV stations are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as  
on the TV (10).  
(When the TV is on)  
Easy playback  
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to  
HDMI input mode and the TV displays the corresponding action.  
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)  
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [PROG/CHECK], [G-Code]§3 etc.  
(When the TV is off)  
Power on link  
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and  
displays the corresponding action.  
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)  
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§1, [1] (PLAY)§2, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [PROG/CHECK], [G-Code]§3 etc.  
[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and MP3  
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.  
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is  
automatically set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed during playback  
or when the unit set to a timer recording.  
Power off link  
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when  
recording, copying, finalising etc.  
When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable,  
the receiver will also turn off.  
§1 This button is available only when this unit is on.  
§2 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents  
from where playback started.  
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.  
§3 Only for Australia and N.Z.  
[Note]  
These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.  
About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.  
RQT9075  
34  
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.  
Easy control only with VIERA remote control  
If you connect this unit to the TV that has “HDAVI Control 2” or “HDAVI Control 3” function with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more  
convenient functions.  
”)  
You can operate this unit using the following buttons on the TV remote control.  
TM  
l
o
[3, 4, 2, 1], [OK], [RETURN], [EXIT], [OPTION] and the coloured buttons.  
r
t
Use the remote control for this unit to operate any other buttons (numbered buttons, etc.) that are not listed above.  
The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote control other than those listed above.  
The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is finished.  
Con  
I
V
A
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.  
Using the FUNCTION  
FUNCTION MENU  
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” window  
D
MENU window to  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
H
using the TV remote control.  
Playback  
operate this unit  
Recording  
If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.  
Delete  
Copy  
This function is available with the  
TV which has “HDAVI Control 2”  
or “HDAVI Control 3” function.  
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV  
remote control, and press [OK].  
To Others  
OK  
RETURN  
IERALink  
About the FUNCTION MENU  
window (33).  
T(V  
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD.  
This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.  
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be  
deleted.  
Pause live TV  
programme  
withe  
This function is available with the  
TV which has “HDAVI Control 3”  
function.  
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.  
tions  
1 When you want to pause the TV programme  
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.  
This unit turns on automatically.  
a
r
ope  
2 When you want to resume  
d
e
Display the Control Panel (below) and press [OK].  
The TV programme resumes.  
Link  
To stop Pause Live TV  
Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed.  
Refer to “Note” on page 33, “To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV”.  
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (below) and display the  
Using the OPTION  
menu window to  
operate this unit  
Top Menu for DVD-Video.  
Control Panel  
Control Panel is displayed  
1 Press [OPTION].  
(below).  
e,g.,  
This function is available with the  
TV which has “HDAVI Control 2”  
or “HDAVI Control 3” function.  
FUNCTION  
MENU  
FUNCTION MENU window is  
displayed (above).  
Control Panel  
FUNCTION MENU  
Top Menu  
Top Menu  
[DVD-V]  
Top menu is displayed (16).  
Menu  
Drive Select  
Menu [DVD-V]  
Menu is displayed (16).  
OK  
RETURN  
Drive Select  
Select the HDD, DVD or SD  
drive  
[Note]  
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top  
Menu for DVD-Video is displayed and while DVD-  
Video is copying.  
Rotate RIGHT  
(JPEG)  
Rotate the still picture (31).  
Rotate LEFT  
(JPEG)  
2 Select an item then press [OK].  
Zoom in (JPEG) Enlarge or shrink the still  
picture (31).  
Zoom out  
(JPEG)  
Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote  
control.  
Perform steps 1 and 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit” (above).  
Using the Control  
Panel  
The Control Panel is displayed (right).  
Control Panel  
When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.  
[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]:  
Play, [EXIT]: Exit the screen.  
While playing still pictures  
[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit  
the screen.  
Pause  
Exit  
Search  
Play  
Search  
Stop  
When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode  
Press [Í DVD] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.  
RQT9075  
When not using “HDAVI Control”  
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (60).  
35  
Editing titles/chapters  
[HDD] [RAM]  
1
During play or while stopped  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalised discs.)  
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, Press the “Red”  
Title/Chapter  
Programmes are recorded as a single title consisting of one  
chapter.  
button to select “VIDEO”.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.  
Title  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles  
HDD  
Title View screen  
MUSIC  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
Chapter  
008  
ARD 10.10.  
ARD 11.10.  
Start  
End  
[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Each  
section between the division points becomes a chapter. (26, 37,  
Create Chapter)  
Previous  
Next  
Page 02/02  
OK  
Select Previous  
Next  
OPTION  
RETURN  
Title  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and  
press [OK].  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Multiple editing  
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
playlist (38).  
The maximum number of items on a disc:  
[HDD]  
Titles: 499  
Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Titles:99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)  
Chapters:Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
3 Press [OPTION].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation  
and press [OK].  
If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and  
press [OK].  
[Note]  
Enter Name  
Set up Protection  
Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot  
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.  
You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.  
Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.  
dividing a title etc).  
Cancel Protection  
Refer to “Title  
Partial Delete  
Change Thumbnail  
Divide Title  
Delete  
Properties  
Edit  
operations”  
(37).  
[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the  
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount  
of free space decreases.  
Create Group  
Release Grouping  
Chapter View  
Table Display  
All Titles  
To edit the group of titles [HDD] (27)  
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.  
Switching the Direct Navigator  
appearance (27)  
Editing titles/chapters and playing  
chapters  
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded  
programmes.  
PICTURE/MUSIC  
Playing still pictures (30)  
To play music recorded on HDD  
(32)  
Preparation  
If you select “Chapter View”  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit  
the connection to this unit.  
Turn the unit on.  
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded  
title to be edited.  
chapter.  
[RAM] Release protection (54, Setting the protection).  
To start play Press [OK].  
To edit Step 6.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View  
HDD  
Chapter View screen  
VIDEO  
008 ARD 11.10.  
0:31.24  
---  
---  
To show other--p- ages/Multiple editing (above)  
6 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select  
the operation and press [OK].  
Delete Chapter  
Create Chapter  
Refer to “Chapter  
operations” (37).  
Combine Chapters  
Title View  
You can go back to Title View.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
RQT9075  
36  
Title operations  
After performing steps 1–4 (36)  
Delete§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
s
r
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete titles.  
Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded  
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (19).  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
e
t
ap  
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.  
Press [OK] to exit the screen.  
Properties  
Properties  
es/ch  
Dinosaur  
l
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
t
i
No.  
026  
Time  
12:19  
t
g
Date 11.10.2006 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)  
Name ARD  
in  
it  
You can give names to recorded titles.  
Enter Name  
d
E
(42, Entering text)  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.  
Set up Protection§  
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Tit  
HDD  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
Cancel Protection§  
007  
008  
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.  
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
ARD 11.10.  
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.  
1Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the  
section you want to delete.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete  
HDD  
Partial Delete  
VIDEO  
[HDD] [RAM]  
008  
PLAY  
Start  
End  
(below, For your reference)  
Next  
Finish  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.  
0:43.21  
3Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
Start  
End  
- -:- -.- -  
- -:- -.- -  
OK  
RETURN  
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title  
View.  
Change Thumbnail  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail  
VIDEO  
HDD  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
008  
1Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.  
Change  
2Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a  
(below, For your reference)  
Finish  
thumbnail is shown.  
0:00.00  
To change the thumbnail  
Start play and select the image  
Change  
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at  
the point you want to change.  
of a thumbnail.  
- -:- -.- -  
ENTER  
3Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
You can divide a title into two.  
Divide Title  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
Divide Title  
VIDEO  
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM]  
008  
PLAY  
Preview  
Divide  
(below, For your reference)  
3Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].  
Finish  
To confirm the division point  
0:43.21  
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays 10  
seconds before and after the division point.)  
To change the division point  
Divide  
- -:- -.- -  
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the  
title.  
[Note]  
The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (78) of the original title.  
Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.  
[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.  
§
Multiple editing is possible.  
Chapter operations  
After performing steps 1–6 (36)  
Delete Chapter§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
Select “Combine Chapters” (below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.  
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the  
Create Chapter  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter  
VIDEO  
HDD  
title.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
008  
PLAY  
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.  
(below, For your reference)  
Create  
Finish  
Repeat this step to divide at other points.  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
0:43.21  
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].  
Combine Chapters  
The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
§
Multiple editing is possible.  
For your reference  
Use Search (26), Time Slip (26) to find the desired point.  
To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (26) and Frame-by-frame (26).  
To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).  
RQT9075  
37  
Creating, editing and playing playlists  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and  
You can arrange the chapters (36) to create a playlist.  
press [OK].  
Title  
Title  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
and press [OK].  
Playlists  
HDD  
- -  
Playlist View  
- -  
- -  
Playlist  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Create  
- -  
- -  
- -  
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title  
Copying (43) a playlist will create a title.  
and press [4].  
Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much  
capacity.  
Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles  
and source chapters.  
You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.  
Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to  
step 7.  
Create  
Playlists  
HDD  
001 ARD 11.10. SAT  
Source Title  
001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
002  
002  
---  
---  
[HDD] [RAM]  
The maximum number of items on a disc:  
Playlists: 99  
Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the  
items entered will not be recorded.  
Source Chapter  
001  
003  
---  
---  
Chapters in Playlist  
---  
---  
---  
OK  
OPTION  
Press RETURN to finish.  
RETURN  
6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you  
want to add to a playlist and press  
Creating playlists  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Preparation  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit  
the connection to this unit.  
Turn the unit on.  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded  
title to be edited.  
[RAM] Release protection (54, Setting the protection).  
You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while  
copying.  
Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system  
currently selected in “TV System” (60).  
[OK].  
Press [3] to cancel.  
Create  
Playlists  
HDD  
001 ARD 11.10. SAT  
Source Title  
001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
002  
002  
---  
---  
Source Chapter  
001  
003  
---  
---  
Chapters in Playlist  
---  
---  
---  
OK  
OPTION  
Press RETURN to finish.  
RETURN  
You can also create a new chapter from the source title.  
Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK]  
(37, Create Chapter).  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to  
insert the chapter and press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
Playlists  
HDD  
Create  
and press [OK].  
001 ARD 11.10. SAT  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Source Title  
001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
002  
002  
---  
---  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
Source Chapter  
001  
003  
---  
---  
---  
Playback  
G-Code Record  
Advanced Copy  
Playlists  
Recording  
Chapters in Playlist  
---  
---  
Delete  
Copy  
Flexible Rec  
DV Auto Rec  
Setup  
OK  
Press RETURN to finish.  
RETURN  
To Others  
OK  
HDD Management  
Press [3] to select other source titles.  
Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.  
RETURN  
8 Press [RETURN].  
All the selected scenes become the playlist.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT9075  
38  
Playlist operations  
After performing steps 1–5 (left)  
Editing and playing playlists/chapters  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)  
Delete§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and  
press [OK].  
1
While stopped  
ts  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and  
cannot be restored.  
Make certain before proceeding.  
lis  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
y
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
Playlist information (e.g., total time and  
Properties  
and press [OK].  
date) is shown.  
ingpla  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-RW‹VR›]  
y
Press [OK] to exit the screen.  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and  
Properties  
press [OK].  
Dinosaur  
ndpla  
No.  
10  
Date 12.10.2006 TUE  
Chapters 002 Total 0:30.53  
a
g
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
RETURN  
OK  
n
i
playlist.  
it  
To start play Press [OK].  
d
(38, Creating playlists, Step 5–8)  
To edit Step 5.  
Create  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Playlists  
HDD  
01  
Playlist View  
- -  
Playlist View screen  
ing,e  
t
a
e
- -  
Copy§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and  
press [OK].  
The copied playlist becomes the newest  
one in the playlist view screen.  
12.10. SUN 0:30  
- -  
Create  
- -  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Cr  
- -  
To show other pages/Multiple editing (36)  
5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select  
the operation and press [OK].  
You can give names to playlists.  
(42, Entering text)  
Enter Name  
[HDD] [RAM]  
If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and  
(37, Change Thumbnail)  
Change  
press [OK].  
Thumbnail  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Create  
Copy  
§
Refer to “Playlist  
operations”.  
Multiple editing is possible.  
Enter Name  
Delete  
Change Thumbnail  
Properties  
Chapter operations  
Edit  
[HDD] [RAM]  
After performing steps 1–7 (left)  
Chapter View  
Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and  
source chapters.  
If you select “Chapter View”  
(38, Creating playlists, Step 5–7)  
Add Chapter  
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
Move  
Chapter  
position to insert the chapter and  
chapter.  
press [OK].  
To start play Press [OK].  
To edit Step 7.  
Playlists  
HDD  
Move Chapter  
01 12.10. SUN 0:11  
002  
Playlists  
HDD  
Chapter View  
Chapter View screen  
001  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30  
0:10.24  
0:19.36  
---  
---  
---  
---  
001  
002  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
0:10.24  
0:19.36  
---  
---  
---  
To show -o-- ther pages/Multiple editing (36)  
7 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select  
the operation and press [OK].  
Previous  
Page 01/01  
Next  
OK  
RETURN  
(37, Create Chapter)  
Create  
Chapter  
Add Chapter  
(37, Combine Chapters)  
Move Chapter  
Combine  
Chapters  
Refer to “Chapter  
Create Chapter  
operations”.  
Combine Chapters  
Delete Chapter  
(37, Delete Chapter)  
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete  
all the chapters in it.  
Delete  
Playlist View  
Chapter§  
You can go back to Playlist View.  
§
Multiple editing is possible.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT9075  
39  
Editing still pictures and music  
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are  
applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.  
Album (still picture) and picture  
operation  
Editing still pictures (JPEG)  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
After performing steps 1–3 (left)  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”  
Delete  
Picture§  
Delete  
You can edit pictures and albums.  
You cannot edit still pictures recorded on CD-R/CD-RW and USB  
memory.  
and press [OK].  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are  
lost and cannot be restored. Make  
certain before proceeding.  
When deleting an album, files other than  
the still picture files inside the album will  
also be deleted. (This does not apply to  
folders under the album concerned.)  
Album§  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.  
[RAM] [SD] Release protection (54, Setting the protection).  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
You can change the date of the picture.  
1Press [2, 1] to select the item  
and press [3, 4] to change.  
2Press [OK].  
Change  
[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the  
Date§  
“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
2
Editing an album:  
Select the album to be edited and  
press [OPTION].  
You can give names to albums.  
(42, Entering text)  
Album names input using this unit may not  
be displayed on other equipment.  
EnterAlbum  
Name  
When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
press [OPTION] without selecting album.  
Editing a still picture:  
If set, this will  
Set up  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
Pic  
1Select the album which contains the still  
picture to edit and press [OK].  
2Select the still pictures to edit and press  
[OPTION].  
protect the still  
picture or album  
from accidental  
deletion.  
Protection§  
Cancel  
103__  
Album Name  
0001  
0002  
Protection§  
Press [2, 1]  
0005  
0006  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and  
press [OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
to select “Yes”  
and press [OK].  
The lock symbol appears when the still  
picture or album is protected.  
Even if the protection setting is used by this  
unit to protect an album, the album may be  
deleted by another unit.  
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is  
shown.  
To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].  
Properties  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation  
[HDD] [RAM] [CD]  
[USB] [SD]  
and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Start”  
and press [OK].  
You cannot copy if multiple albums are  
selected.  
Copy to  
To edit the album  
(e.g., [HDD])  
DVD-RAM  
[HDD]  
Useful functions during still picture  
play (31)  
Copy to  
Start Slide Show  
Slide Show Setting  
HDD  
[RAM]  
Add Pictures  
Create Album  
Edit Album  
Delete Album  
Change Date  
1Press [2, 1] to select “Start”  
or “Yes” and press [OK].  
Add  
Pictures  
Create  
Set up Protection  
Cancel Protection  
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select  
the album that contains the  
still picture you want to add  
and press [OK].  
Copy to DVD-RAM  
Album  
VIDEO/MUSIC  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
Album (still picture) and picture operation  
(right)  
3Press [3, 4] to select the item  
and press [OK].  
If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:  
Select the still picture you want to add  
and press [OK].  
To edit still picture  
(e.g., [HDD])  
If “Copy all pictures” is selected:  
All the still pictures in the album will be  
copied.  
Delete Picture  
Properties  
Album (still picture) and picture  
operation (right)  
Change Date  
Set up Protection  
Cancel Protection  
4Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”  
or “No” and press [OK].  
If you want to continue copying, select  
Yes” and go to step .  
You can go back to Album View.  
Album View  
Only for “Create Album”  
5Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”  
or “No” and press [OK].  
To return to the previous screen  
If “Yes” is selected:  
Press [RETURN].  
You can give names to albums. (42,  
Entering text)  
If “No” is selected:  
The album name is automatically given.  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
§
Multiple editing is possible.  
[Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is displayed]  
[Note]  
Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change Date”,  
“Copy to DVD-RAM”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or “Create  
Album”.  
RQT9075  
40  
Editing music  
[HDD]  
Deleting still pictures and music using  
DELETE Navigator  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.  
c
i
s
u
1
While stopped  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to  
select “MUSIC”.  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
dm  
n
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and  
a
s
e
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play CD on  
press [OK].  
HDD” or “Play MP3 on HDD” and  
press [OK].  
ur  
t
3
[HDD] [RAM]  
lpic  
Press the colour button to select  
“PICTURE” or “MUSIC”.  
3
Editing an album/group  
i
t
Press [3, 4] to select the album/  
group and press [OPTION].  
[HDD] If you pressed the “Yellow” button, press [3, 4] to  
select “Delete CD on HDD” or “Delete MP3 on HDD” and  
press [OK].  
ings  
t
i
Editing a track  
Ed  
4
Deleting an album (still picture), album (CD) or group  
1Press [3, 4] to select the album/group and  
press [OK].  
(PMrPe3)ss [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item  
and press [DELETE ¢].  
2Press [3, 4] to select the track and press  
[OPTION].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation  
Deleting a still picture or track (MP3)  
1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album or  
group which contains the still picture or  
track to delete and press [OK].  
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still  
picture or track and press [OK].  
and press [OK].  
To edit the album (CD)/group (MP3)  
e.g., Album View (CD)  
Delete Album  
Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/MP3)  
operation (below)  
Enter Album Name  
You can confirm the item that you have selected using the  
option menu.  
Repeat Play Setting  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View” (40,  
step 3).  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG)  
View” (40, step 3).  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View (CD)”  
(left, step 4).  
Useful functions during music play (32)  
Track View  
Sort  
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to  
play—Direct Navigator (27)  
Playing still pictures (30)  
VIDEO/PICTURE  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Track View (MP3)”  
(left, step 4).  
below  
To edit the track (CD/MP3)  
e.g., Track View (MP3)  
To show other pages [Album (still picture) and still  
picture only]  
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Delete Track  
Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/MP3)  
Properties  
Multiple deleting [Album (still picture) and still picture  
only]  
operation (below)  
Enter Track Name  
Enter Artist Name  
Repeat Play Setting  
Group View  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
You can go back to Album View (CD)/Group  
View (MP3)  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and  
press [OK].  
Useful functions during music play (32)  
The item is deleted.  
To return to the previous screen  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
[Note]  
Album (CD)/group (MP3) and track (CD/  
MP3) operation  
You cannot delete a track (CD) individually.  
After performing step 1-4 (above)  
Delete Album (CD)  
Delete Group (MP3)  
Delete Track (MP3)  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”  
and press [OK].  
Once deleted, the recorded  
contents are lost and cannot be  
restored. Make certain before  
proceeding.  
Enter Album Name (CD) You can give names to albums/groups  
Enter Group Name  
(MP3)  
Enter Track Name (CD/  
MP3)  
and tracks.  
(42, Entering text)  
Enter Artist Name (CD/  
MP3)  
You can edit the artist name of the  
track.  
(42, Entering text)  
RQT9075  
[Note]  
Timer recordings do not start while editing music.  
41  
Entering text  
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are  
applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a  
character and press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
[SD]  
Repeat this step to enter other characters.  
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.  
The maximum number of characters:  
To delete a character  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field  
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Characters  
64 (44§)  
Using the numbered buttons to enter characters  
Title  
e.g., entering the letter “R”  
Playlist  
64  
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.  
5
J
K
N
Q
U
L
O
R
V
Album of still pictures  
Album (CD) ([HDD])  
Group (MP3) ([HDD])  
Track (CD/MP3) ([HDD])  
Artist (CD/MP3) ([HDD])  
Disc ([RAM])  
36  
2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.  
3 Press [OK].  
7
7
40  
6 M  
To enter a space  
Press [DELETE ¢] and press  
[OK].  
7
40  
P
T
7
40  
8
40  
3 Press [] (Set).  
64  
“Writing...” appears then the screen returns to the Title view  
screen and so on.  
§Title name for timer recording  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Characters  
To end partway  
Press [RETURN].  
Text is not added.  
Title  
Disc  
44  
40  
For your reference  
[SD]  
Characters  
36  
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu  
after finalisation (56). When entering a title name, the name that  
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview”  
window.  
Album of still pictures  
[Note]  
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.  
Enter Name  
Chapter 1_  
_
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
/
9
$
0
1 Show Enter Name screen.  
Top Menu Preview  
Chapter 1  
*
Title (timer recording)  
%
i
7
&
Select “Programme Name” in step 3 on page 24.  
Title  
Select “Enter Name” in step 4 on page 36.  
Playlist  
Select “Enter Name” in step 5 on page 39.  
Disc  
Select “Disc Name” in step 1 of “Providing a name for a  
disc” on page 54.  
Album (CD) ([HDD])  
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on  
page 41.  
Group (MP3) ([HDD])  
Select “Enter Group Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on  
page 41.  
Track (CD/MP3) ([HDD])  
Select “Enter Track Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on  
page 41.  
Artist (CD/MP3) ([HDD])  
Select “Enter Artist Name” in step 4 of “Editing music” on  
page 41.  
Album of still pictures  
Select “Enter Album Name” in step 3, “Editing still pictures  
(JPEG)” on page 40.  
Name field: shows the text you have entered  
Enter Name  
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
/
9
$
0
Top Menu Preview  
*
d
g
j
%
h
k
i
7
&
@
_
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
]
Delete  
Set  
m
n
o
[
M
P
T
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
(
)
-
v
}
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
\
ꢃꢃ  
0
9
^
`
SELECT  
Space  
RETURN  
OK  
RQT9075  
42  
Copying titles or playlists  
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.  
Copy  
Advanced Copy  
Features  
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult Make a copy list and then copy.  
settings.  
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the  
way you want.  
ts  
Copy direction  
HDD DVD  
lis  
y
DVD HDD  
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]  
pla  
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)  
High speed mode copy§1  
or  
s
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with finalised discs.  
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.  
e
l
§2  
Changing recording mode  
Finalise§3  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
ngit  
i
Automatically finalised  
Can be selected  
y
High speed mode  
Normal speed mode  
High speed mode  
Normal speed mode  
Copying SD Video from an SD card  
/Cop  
t
([EH68]) (47)  
[HDD] [RAM] only  
x
Copying playlists§4  
§5  
§5  
Are chapters maintained?  
Are thumbnails maintained?  
Recording and Playing while Copying  
ngte  
i
r
§6  
§7  
§6  
§8  
te  
n
E
§1 To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (The default setting is “On”. 58).  
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.  
When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with high-speed copy.  
Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.  
Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.).  
Titles that contain many deleted segments.  
[EH68] SD Video titles copied to the HDD from an SD card.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed  
)
§2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent against degradation of picture quality.)  
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.  
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (56).  
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.  
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.  
§5 [RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minutes [+R] about 8-minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.  
§6 Thumbnails return to the default position.  
§7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.  
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD  
[However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation or when copying SD Video from an SD card ([EH68]).]  
You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.  
You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (20).  
– Still pictures cannot be played.  
Approximate copying times (Max. speed)  
(excludes time required to write data management information)  
HDD  
5X Speed  
DVD-RAM  
12X Speed  
4X Speed  
4X Speed  
DVD-RW§3  
8X Speed  
+R§4  
4X Speed  
+R DL§2  
4X Speed  
+RW  
DVD-R§1  
DVD-R DL§2  
Recording  
Mode  
XP  
SP  
LP  
Recorded  
Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed  
time  
12 min.  
6 min.  
3 min.  
2 min.  
1 min. 30 s.  
time  
5 min. 46 s.  
2 min. 30 s.  
1 min. 21 s.  
58 s.  
time  
time  
time  
time  
time  
1 hour  
5x  
10x  
24x  
44x  
62x  
75x  
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
3 min. 45 s.  
2 min. 30 s.  
1 min. 53 s.  
4x  
8x  
16x  
24x  
32x  
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
3 min. 45 s.  
2 min. 30 s.  
1 min. 57 s.  
4x  
8x  
16x  
24x  
31x  
8 min. 20 s.  
3 min. 45 s.  
1 min. 53 s.  
7x  
16x  
32x  
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
3 min. 45 s.  
4x  
8x  
16x  
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
3 min. 45 s.  
4x  
8x  
16x  
1
10x  
20x  
30x  
40x  
EP (6H)  
EP (8H)  
48 s.  
The above values indicate the quickest possible times and speeds to high speed copy a one hour title recorded on the HDD to a high speed  
recording compatible disc. Depending on what part of the disc is being written to, the features of the disc, etc., the times and speeds will vary.  
§1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.  
§2 In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL.  
§3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.  
§4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.  
[Note]  
When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.  
Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.  
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer)  
and +R DL (single-sided, Double Layer)  
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily  
copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed  
to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to  
the HDD are then deleted.  
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.  
– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When  
copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when  
copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free space in SP  
mode is needed on the HDD.)  
Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One time  
only recording”  
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (78) compatible  
DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.  
Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the HDD.  
Titles will not be copied if they are protected (37).  
You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only recording”  
titles.  
Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be registered  
on the same copying list.  
When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to be  
copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 499 in total.  
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may  
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (11)  
RQT9075  
43  
Copying titles or playlists  
Before copying  
When copying a title with main and secondary audio  
Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from  
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (59) when:  
Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),  
+R, +R DL and +RW.  
When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (59)  
and you are copying in XP mode.  
5
After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-  
Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-  
only and you can no longer record or edit.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
press [OK].  
Copy starts.  
To return to the previous screen  
Speed and recording mode when copying  
Press [RETURN].  
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed  
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following  
To stop copying (45)  
table.  
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and  
Rec for High Speed Copy (58)  
Copy speed  
functions (46)  
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” set to “On”. §  
High speed  
To check the properties of a title and sort COPY  
Navigator  
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.  
Normal speed  
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press  
[OPTION].  
When making a copy of multiple titles that  
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed  
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.  
COPY Navigator  
HDD  
All Titles  
Disc Space: 4310MB  
Total Size: 0MB( 0%)  
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title  
Total  
:
0
001  
002  
003  
004  
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30  
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15  
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00  
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05  
§
In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to  
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.  
Rec time  
0:52(SP)  
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10  
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25  
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30  
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00  
---  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”  
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.  
When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for  
Recording” do not match.  
When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR  
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
Properties  
Page 01/01  
Sort  
OK  
Grouped Titles  
RETURN  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”  
and press [OK].  
Properties:  
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are  
shown.  
[Note]  
Sort (All Titles screen only):  
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to  
display titles by No., recording date, day, channel, recording start  
time and title name. (You cannot select a title if it has a check mark.)  
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is  
cancelled.  
Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system (PAL  
or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot  
be copied.  
Preparation  
Insert a disc that you can use for copying (11).  
Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.  
[Note]  
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording  
compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the  
sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.  
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in  
“DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (58).  
If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title  
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.  
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and  
then copy the contents of the list (45).  
Copy  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL  
are automatically finalised (78). After finalising, the discs  
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD  
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.  
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)  
When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR.  
(However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode,  
copy will not be performed.)  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and  
press [OK].  
COPY Navigator  
HDD  
All Titles  
Disc Space: 4310MB  
Total Size: 0MB( 0%)  
No. Name Date Day Time Name of title  
Total  
:
0
001  
002  
003  
004  
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30  
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15  
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00  
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05  
Rec time  
0:52(SP)  
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10  
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25  
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30  
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00  
---  
Page 01/01  
OK  
Select  
OPTION  
RETURN  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the title you  
want to copy and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all  
necessary items.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
4 Press [OK].  
RQT9075  
44  
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If  
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at  
a time.  
When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,  
the check mark is cancelled.  
When copying to a disc using high speed mode,  
Copying using the copying list–  
Advanced Copy  
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]  
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]  
ts  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “  
” can be registered.  
” or  
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[SD] > [HDD] [RAM]  
lis  
y
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “  
registered.  
To show other pages (below)  
” can be  
pla  
See also “Before copying” (44).  
or  
s
5 Press [OK].  
1
While stopped  
e
l
To edit the copying list (46)  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” (46)  
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient).  
ngit  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
y
6 Press [2] to confirm.  
and press [OK].  
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
Copying” and press [OK].  
Cop  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced  
Copy” and press [OK].  
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed  
recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or  
+RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than  
normal.  
Copy  
Cancel All  
Source  
HDD  
DVD  
1 Copy Direction  
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal  
(Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup  
menu (58).  
HDD ꢀꢁDVD  
Destination  
Copy Mode  
VIDEO High Speed  
2
0
Create List  
3
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
Select the copy direction.  
Start Copying  
OK  
RETURN  
press [OK] to start copying.  
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]  
several times (step 7).  
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or  
“Copy Only” and press [OK].  
If “Copy & Finalise” is selected  
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also  
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no  
longer record or edit.  
4 Set the copy direction.  
If you are not going to change the copying direction, press  
[4] (step 5).  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].  
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to  
“DVD”, or vice versa. (Go to step 6)  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].  
The same drive as the copy source cannot be selected.  
6 Press [2] to confirm.  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
To stop copying  
5 Set the recording mode.  
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.  
(You cannot stop while finalising)  
If you are not going to change the recording mode, press  
[4] (step 6).  
When High-speed copying  
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are  
copied.  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO” and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].  
6 Press [2] to confirm.  
When Normal Speed copying  
Copies until the point cancelled. However titles with “One time  
only recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied  
at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are  
cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain  
on the HDD.  
6 Register titles and playlists for copy.  
If you are going to copy a registered list without making any  
changes to it (step 7).  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while  
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.  
However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to  
disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the  
point canceled are copied.  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
Copy  
Cancel All  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
( 0%)  
0MB  
Size:  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
1 Copy Direction  
No. Size  
HDD ꢀꢁDVD  
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of  
remaining writable disc space becomes less.  
Copy Mode  
VIDEO High Speed  
2
Create List  
3
Page 01/01  
To return to the previous screen  
Create copy list.  
Start Copying  
OK  
Press [RETURN].  
OPTION  
RETURN  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the  
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.  
Recording and playing while copying  
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed  
copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)  
Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.  
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.  
To confirm the current progress  
Create List  
HDD  
All Titles  
VIDEO Playlists  
- - -  
007  
008  
0:30(XP)  
Press [STATUS].  
[Note]  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
- - -  
ARD 11.10. SAT  
- - -  
- - -  
Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the  
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.  
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)  
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Select  
Next  
OK  
OPTION  
Previous  
Next  
RETURN  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press  
[;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select  
all necessary items.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
RQT9075  
45  
Copying titles or playlists  
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions  
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and  
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators  
+R DL  
[DVD-V] > [HDD]  
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high  
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW  
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW  
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.  
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD  
according to the set time.  
If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that  
portion of title is not recorded.  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (58) is set to “On” and you  
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected  
in “Aspect for Recording” (58) of the Setup menu.  
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high  
speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)  
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in  
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)  
[+R]DL]  
performed.  
is displayed, but copy cannot be  
Title with “One time only recording” restriction  
(20, When recording the “One time only  
recording” broadcasts)  
Operations and on screen displays during copy are also  
recorded.  
Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent  
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.  
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only  
recording” restriction after copying. (20, When  
recording the “One time only recording”  
broadcasts)  
The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.  
Preparation  
Insert the finalised disc (15).  
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)  
Still picture(s) cannot be copied.  
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-  
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding  
system from that of the TV system currently  
selected on the unit.  
Titles and playlists displaying these marks  
cannot be selected.  
(NTSC)  
(PAL)  
Video”) (45, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)  
1 Set “Copy Time”.  
If you are not going to change the setting (step 2).  
Setting the unit to copy according to the set time  
Data size of each registered item  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].  
Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].  
4 Press [2] to confirm.  
Size:  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Data size recorded to the copy  
destination  
Size:  
0MB (0%)  
No. Size  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
When copying at normal speed, the  
total data size will change according to  
the recording mode.  
The total data size shown may be  
larger than the sum of the data sizes  
for each registered item, because of  
data management information being  
written to the copy destination, etc.  
Copy will continue until there is not enough available  
recording space on the HDD.  
Page 01/01  
Create copy list.  
Setting the copying time  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].  
Copy  
Cancel All  
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and  
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.  
1 Copy Direction  
DVD ꢀꢁHDD  
2
Hour  
00 Min.  
Copy Mode  
2
3
DVD-Video XP  
Set the time a few minutes  
longer.  
To edit the copying list  
Delete All  
Copy Time  
Select the item in step 6–5 (45)  
1 Press [OPTION].  
Press OK to change the setting.  
Start Copying  
OK  
Add  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press  
RETURN  
Delete  
[OK].  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press  
[3, 4] to set the recording time.  
Move  
Delete All:  
6 Press [OK].  
Delete all items registered on the copying list.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
7 Press [2] to confirm.  
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after  
the content being played finishes.  
Add:  
Add new items to the copying list.  
Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to  
include the operation time before play begins.  
You can also set the recording time with the numbered  
buttons.  
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all  
necessary items.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
Press [OK].  
2
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
Delete:  
Copying” and press [OK].  
Delete the selected items.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start copying.  
The disc top menu is displayed.  
Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is  
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising  
the disc (56).  
Move:  
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.  
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].  
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists  
After performing steps 1–3 (45)  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.  
When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the  
copy source  
When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,  
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.  
RQT9075  
46  
3
When the top menu is displayed  
Copying SD Video from a video  
equipment [EH68]  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title  
you want to start copying, and press  
[OK].  
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been  
taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, can be  
copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.  
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)  
You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this unit.  
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.  
You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.  
ts  
My favorite  
01/02  
lis  
y
01  
02  
Chapter  
1
Chapter  
2
03  
04  
pla  
Chapter  
3
Chapter  
4
05  
06  
or  
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are  
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has  
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is  
reached.)  
s
e
l
VIDEO§  
SD Video  
ngit  
y
REC  
HDD  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
DVD-RAM  
Cop  
To stop copying  
Press [].  
You can also press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds to stop  
copying.  
If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.  
[Note]  
The screen on the right is recorded at the  
beginning.  
§DVD Video Recording format  
The content is recorded as 1 title from the start  
of copy to the end.  
Preparation  
1
2
3
Turn on both this unit and the camera.  
If play does not begin automatically or if the top  
menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.  
Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original  
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.  
If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video  
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (45, Copying  
using the copying list–Advanced Copy).  
Connect the camera to this unit.  
Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for  
data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.  
Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.  
The display below automatically appears when you connect the  
camera to this unit.  
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press [OK].  
Then go to step 7 on page 45.  
Copying SD Video from an SD card  
[EH68]  
USB device  
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been  
taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc,  
can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM.  
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)  
You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card with this unit.  
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.  
You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.  
This unit cannot copy AVCHD format motion pictures from an SD  
card.  
Play Video (DivX)  
Copy Video (MPEG2)  
Play Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy Pictures (JPEG)  
Play Music (MP3)  
Copy Music (MP3)  
Update CD database on HDD  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the  
copy list.  
If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video (MPEG2)”  
is not displayed.  
SD Video  
VIDEO§  
HDD  
DVD-RAM  
§
DVD Video Recording format  
The display below automatically appears when you insert a card  
into the SD card slot while stopped.  
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video (MPEG2)” and press [OK].  
Then go to step 7 on page 45.  
SD Card  
Copy Video (MPEG2)  
Play Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy Pictures (JPEG)  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
How to copy  
Refer to “Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy” (45)  
Please set the items in step 4 and 5 as shown below.  
Copy Direction:  
Source:SD CARD  
Copy Mode:  
Format:VIDEO  
SD Video on an SD card are automatically registered on the  
copy list.  
If there are no SD Video on an SD card, “Copy Video (MPEG2)”  
is not displayed.  
RQT9075  
47  
Copying still pictures  
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are applicable  
to the DMR-EH68 model only  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures  
(JPEG)” and press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM] [USB] [SD]  
Copy New Pictures  
SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be  
used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment.  
SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only  
compatible with SD Memory Cards.  
Copy from  
Copy to  
SD CARD  
HDD  
You cannot copy pictures recorded to CD-R/CD-RW.  
Still pictures copied from USB memories or SD cards are grouped  
by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and  
press [2, 1] to select the drive.  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”  
Copying all the still pictures on the USB  
memory—Copy All Pictures  
[USB] > [HDD] or [RAM]  
and press [OK].  
To stop copying  
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.  
1
While stopped  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
Insert the USB memory (15).  
The menu is automatically displayed.  
[Note]  
USB device  
This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and 30  
SD cards. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older  
information will be deleted.  
Play Video (DivX)  
Play Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy Pictures (JPEG)  
Play Music (MP3)  
Copy Music (MP3)  
Update CD database on HDD  
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/  
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (14), copying will  
stop partway through.  
You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
Copying using the copying list  
[HDD] [RAM] [SD]  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures  
(JPEG)” and press [OK].  
Copy All Pictures  
1
While stopped  
Copy from  
Copy to  
USB  
HDD  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to” and  
and press [OK].  
press [2, 1] to select the drive.  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Copy”  
Copy” and press [OK].  
and press [OK].  
Copy  
Cancel All  
Source  
SD CARD  
HDD  
To stop copying  
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.  
1 Copy Direction  
SD CARD ꢀꢁHDD  
Destination  
Copy Mode  
2
PICTURE High Speed  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
0
Create List  
3
If you are not going to change the registered list press [4]  
several times (step 7).  
[Note]  
The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same  
4 Set the copy direction.  
at the copy destination.  
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/  
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (14), copying will  
stop partway through.  
If you are not going to change the copying direction, press  
[4] (step 5).  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].  
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.  
6 Press [2] to confirm.  
You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.  
Copying new still pictures on the SD  
card—Copy New Pictures [EH68]  
[SD] > [HDD] or [RAM]  
5 Set the copy mode.  
This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if  
still pictures are imported from the same SD card, then only new still  
pictures will be imported.  
If you are not going to change the recording mode, press  
[4] (step 6).  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].  
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.  
4 Press [2] to confirm.  
1
While stopped  
Insert the SD card. (15).  
The menu is automatically displayed.  
SD Card  
Play Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy Pictures (JPEG)  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
RQT9075  
48  
[Note]  
6 Register still pictures for copy.  
The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy  
list may not be the same at the copy destination.  
If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination  
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still  
pictures.  
If you are going to copy a registered list without making any  
changes to it (step 7).  
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.  
Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same  
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/  
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (14), copying will  
stop partway through.  
list.  
ures  
Copy  
ct  
i
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Cancel All  
You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.  
p
Picture  
Picture/Folder  
1 Copy Direction  
No. Size  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
SD CARD ꢀꢁHDD  
il  
To show other pages  
Copy Mode  
PICTURE High Speed  
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Create List  
3
ingst  
Page 01/01  
y
Create copy list.  
Start Copying  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
To edit the copying list  
Cop  
To register individual still pictures  
Select the item in step 6–4 (for a still picture) or 6–6  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press  
[;].  
Delete All  
(for a folder) (left)  
1 Press [OPTION].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press  
Add  
Delete  
[OK].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select  
all necessary items.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If  
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at  
a time.  
Delete All:  
Delete all items registered on the copying list.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
Add:  
Add new items to the copying list.  
To show other pages (right)  
To select another folder (right)  
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder and press  
[;].  
4 Press [OK].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all  
necessary items.  
To edit the copying list (right)  
5 Press [2] to confirm.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
Press [OK].  
2
Delete:  
To register on a folder by folder basis  
Delete the selected items.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].  
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists  
Copy  
After performing steps 1–3 (48, Copying using the copying list)  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Cancel All  
Picture  
Picture/Folder  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
1 Copy Direction  
No. Size  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
SD CARD ꢀꢁHDD  
Copy Mode  
2
The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.  
When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the  
copy source  
When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,  
remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select  
all necessary items.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
To select another folder  
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If  
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at  
a time.  
After performing steps 6–2 (left, To register individual still  
pictures)  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].  
To show other pages (right)  
6 Press [OK].  
Create List  
SD CARD  
Create List  
SD CARD  
Picture (JPEG)  
Folder  
To edit the copying list (right)  
7 Press [2] to confirm.  
Folder  
103__DVD  
\DCIM\100__DVD  
0001  
----  
----  
0002  
----  
----  
0003  
----  
0004  
----  
001 100__DVD  
002 101__DVD  
003 102__DVD  
004 103__DVD  
---  
---  
---  
---  
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
----  
----  
Page 01/01  
Picture 0012 File 0012  
Page 001/001  
Previous  
Next  
Copying” and press [OK].  
OK  
OK  
RETURN  
Only when copying individual still pictures from [HDD] [RAM]  
RETURN  
to [SD]  
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,  
select “Folder”.  
5:  
[0] [0] [5]  
15: [0] [1] [5]  
Folder  
New folder  
115: [1] [1] [5]  
001 100__DVD  
002 101__DVD  
003 102__DVD  
The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the  
same list.  
---  
New folder  
---  
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
press [OK] to start copying.  
To stop copying  
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
RQT9075  
49  
Copying music to HDD  
You can store the two formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.  
[Note]  
While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer  
Music CD (CD-DA)  
recordings will not proceed.  
When copying music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal  
Gracenote® Database to obtain title information. The album name,  
track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you  
find the track easily when playing back.  
Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc, USB  
memory or SD card.  
CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)  
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.  
MP3  
You can copy MP3 files from the USB memory.  
Copying music from a USB memory  
[USB] > [HDD]  
About the Gracenote® Database  
You can copy MP3 files recorded on USB memory devices to the  
HDD by file or folder.  
The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and retrieve  
CD title information.  
One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.  
The maximum number of groups on HDD: 300  
The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000  
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)  
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of groups that  
can be recorded will be reduced.  
When a CD is inserted or recording from a CD begins, the unit will  
automatically search for and obtain information about the inserted  
CD.  
The Gracenote® Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles  
and artist information can be obtained. Please note however that the  
newest CD titles, etc. may not be registered yet to the internal  
database. This unit has an internal database containing information  
for approximately 350,000 album titles.  
1
While stopped  
Insert the USB memory (15).  
You can update the internal database (51).  
The menu is automatically displayed.  
If there are CDs with very similar title information, then the incorrect  
title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions are found,  
then track name, album name and artist name will be blank.  
In these cases, enter the CD title information manually, after  
recording to the HDD has completed.  
USB device  
Play Video (DivX)  
Play Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy Pictures (JPEG)  
Play Music (MP3)  
Copy Music (MP3)  
Update CD database on HDD  
Copying music from a CD  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
[CD] > [HDD]  
All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD.  
(Cannot record track-by-track.)  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music  
(MP3)” and press [OK].  
One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.  
Audio quality: LPCM  
The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300  
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)  
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that  
can be recorded will be reduced.  
“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set to  
“USB#HDD” and “MUSIC High Speed”, respectively.  
3 Register MP3 files for copy.  
If you are going to copy a registered list without making any  
changes to it (step 4).  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
You can register MP3 files or MP3 file folders.  
MP3 files and folders cannot be registered on the same list.  
1 Insert a music CD.  
Copy  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Cancel All  
The menu is automatically displayed.  
Track  
Track/Folder  
1 Copy Direction  
No. Size  
Name of item  
New item (Total = 0)  
USB ꢀꢁHDD  
CD  
Copy Mode  
MUSIC High Speed  
2
Play Music  
Copy Music  
Create List  
3
Page 01/01  
Create copy list.  
Start Copying  
OK  
SELECT  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
OK  
To register individual MP3 files  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select  
all necessary items.  
and press [OK].  
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and  
searches for the title information.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
P O W E R E D B Y  
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If  
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at  
a time.  
5 Press [OK].  
To edit the copying list (51)  
6 Press [2] to confirm.  
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found  
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and  
press [OK].  
Recording starts.  
To stop recording  
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.  
If the recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be  
recorded.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
RQT9075  
50  
To register on a folder by folder basis  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Track/Folder” and press [OK].  
To update the Gracenote® Database  
To update the database with information on CDs that were recently  
released, follow the instructions below.  
Copy  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Cancel All  
Track  
Track/Folder  
Preparing the update data  
1 Copy Direction  
No. Size  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
USB ꢀꢁHDD  
1
Visit the following website.  
Copy Mode  
2
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select  
all necessary items.  
2
Download the data to your USB memory.  
USB memory 1 GB or larger is required.  
Refer to the instruction on the website for more information.  
ctoHD  
i
s
u
Updating the database on this unit  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
ingm  
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If  
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at  
a time.  
3
4
Turn on this unit.  
y
Insert the USB memory (15).  
The menu is automatically displayed.  
Cop  
6 Press [OK].  
USB device  
To edit the copying list (below)  
Play Video (DivX)  
Play Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy Pictures (JPEG)  
Play Music (MP3)  
Copy Music (MP3)  
Update CD database on HDD  
7 Press [2] to confirm.  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
Copying” and press [OK].  
For individual files only  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
When specifying an existing folder as the copying  
destination  
5
6
Press [3, 4] to select “Update CD database on HDD” and press  
[OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Update” and press [OK].  
Updating takes up to 20 minutes.  
Do not disconnect the USB memory and the AC mains lead  
while updating.  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].  
When creating a new folder as the copying destination  
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
2 Enter the folder name (42, Entering text).  
Once started, you cannot cancel updating.  
A message appears when updating is finished.  
Press [OK].  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
7
press [OK] to start copying.  
[Note]  
To stop copying  
Timer recordings do not start while updating.  
Press and hold [RETURN] for 3 seconds.  
Updating overwrites the internal database forcibly regardless of  
whether the data in the USB memory is the latest or not. Make  
sure you download the latest version from the website.  
Some of the CD title information in the database may be deleted  
after updating the database.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
[Note]  
No name will be assigned after copying a CD to HDD if the CD title  
information of the CD is not registered in the database. Even if the  
CD title information of that CD is added to the database by  
updating later, the information will not be assigned to the track/  
album already copied on the HDD. (The names will be still blank.)  
Depending on the situation of Panasonic or Gracenote, upgrading  
the Gracenote® Database and providing it through the Web may be  
discontinued without notice.  
The sequence in which the MP3 files are registered on the copy list  
may not be the same at the copy destination.  
If MP3 files are already contained inside the copy destination  
folder, the new MP3 files are recorded following the existing MP3  
files.  
To edit the copying list  
Select the item in step 3–5 (for a MP3 file) (50,  
Delete All  
Copying music from a USB memory) or 3–6 (for a  
folder) (above).  
1 Press [OPTION].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press  
Add  
Delete  
[OK].  
Delete All:  
Delete all items registered on the copying list.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
Add:  
Add new items to the copying list.  
1
Press [3, 4] to select the MP3 file or folder and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all  
necessary items.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
2
Press [OK].  
Delete:  
Delete the selected items.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists  
After performing steps 1–2 (50, Copying music from a USB  
memory)  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.  
– When a file has been recorded or deleted at the copy source  
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,  
remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the copy  
direction, etc.  
[Note]  
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of  
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (14), copying  
will stop partway through.  
RQT9075  
51  
Using on-screen menus/Status message  
Using on-screen menus  
Disc menu—Setting the disc content  
Soundtrack§  
Common procedures  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
The disc’s audio attributes appear.  
1 Press [DISPLAY].  
[DVD-V]  
Select the audio and language (below, Audio attribute,  
Language).  
DivX  
Select the soundtrack number.  
Disc  
CꢀDigital 2/0 ch  
1
Soundtrack  
Play  
Off  
Subtitle  
Picture  
L R  
Audio channel  
Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only  
one audio type.  
Sound  
Other  
Subtitle§  
Menu  
Item  
Setting  
[DVD-V]  
Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,  
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you  
cannot select or change.  
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (below,  
Language).  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only  
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)  
Turn the subtitle on/off.  
Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.  
DivX  
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the subtitle number.  
Subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not multiple  
subtitles.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and  
press [1].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and  
press [1].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.  
Angle§ [DVD-V]  
Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].  
Change the number to select an angle.  
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX  
(26, Changing audio during play)  
Source Select (DivX)  
To clear the on-screen menus  
Press [DISPLAY].  
Automatic:  
The constructing method of the DivX contents is  
automatically distinguished and output.  
Interlace:  
Select when the disc contents were recorded using  
interlace.  
Progressive:  
Select when the disc contents were recorded using  
progressive.  
PBC (Playback control 78) [VCD]  
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.  
§
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using  
the menus (16) on the disc.  
The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot  
change when there is no recording.  
Audio attribute  
LPCM/ÎDigital/DTS/MPEG:  
k (kHz):  
Signal type  
Sampling frequency  
Number of bits  
b (bit):  
ch (channel):  
Number of channels  
Language  
ENG: English  
FRA: French  
DEU: German  
ITA: Italian  
ESP: Spanish  
NLD: Dutch  
DAN: Danish  
POR: Portuguese  
THA: Thai  
POL: Polish  
CES: Czech  
SLK: Slovak  
HUN: Hungarian  
FIN: Finnish  
RUS: Russian  
JPN: Japanese  
CHI: Chinese  
KOR: Korean  
MAL: Malay  
SVE: Swedish  
NOR: Norwegian  
¢:  
Others  
VIE: Vietnamese  
RQT9075  
52  
Sound menu—Change the sound effect  
Play menu—Change the play sequence  
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.  
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that  
can be selected will differ.  
V.S.S.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
e
(Dolby Digital, MPEG, 2-channel or over only)  
g
a
s
Repeat Play  
Enjoy a surround-like effect if you are using two front speakers  
only.  
Turn V.S.S. off if it causes distortion. (Check the surround  
function on the connected equipment.)  
V.S.S. does not work for bilingual recordings.  
s
All  
Chapter  
[CD] [VCD]  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
me  
Group  
PL (Playlist)  
Title  
MP3 (except [USB])  
us  
t
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]  
Dialog Enhancer  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
Sta  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
and DivX  
/
s
Track  
[CD] [VCD] and MP3 (except [USB])  
u
n
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)  
Select “Off” to cancel.  
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue  
easier to hear.  
me  
n
e
Picture menu—Change the picture quality  
e
r
Other menu—Change the display position  
Position  
c
Playback NR  
Reduces noise and picture degradation.  
Progressive§ (78)  
1–5:  
igon-s  
The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu moves.  
Us  
Select “On” to enable progressive output.  
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.  
Status messages  
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (above) is set to “On”.]  
Press [STATUS].  
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit  
the type of title being played (78, Film and video).  
The display changes each time you press the button.  
When the output signal is PAL  
Selected drive status/type of disc or USB memory  
The remaining time appears here while stopped.  
HDD  
REC  
PLAY  
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)  
Auto:  
Video:  
Film:  
Automatically detects the film and video  
content, and appropriately converts it.  
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is  
distorted.  
Recording or play status/input channel  
STEREO  
L R  
TV audio type being received (below)  
Selected audio type  
Select this if the edges of  
the film content appear  
DVD REC  
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator  
jagged or rough when  
“Auto” is selected.  
However, if the video  
content is distorted as  
Title number and elapsed time during play/  
shown in the illustration  
Recording mode  
Available recording time and  
recording mode  
to the right, then select “Auto”.  
Date and time  
When the output signal is NTSC  
Remain  
18:53:50 11.10.  
13:50 XP  
Auto1  
(normal):  
Auto2:  
Automatically detects the film and video  
content, and appropriately converts it.  
In addition to “Auto1”, automatically detects  
film contents with different frame rates and  
appropriately converts it.  
T1 0:05.14 XP T2 0:00.10 XP  
Title number and elapsed time during recording/  
Recording mode  
Video:  
Select when using “Auto1” and “Auto2”, and  
the content is distorted.  
When using Pause Live TV  
Input NR (Only when AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV is selected)  
The time when the picture currently displayed on the  
television was broadcasted  
Reduces video tape noise while copying.  
Automatic:  
Play 15:05:13  
Noise reduction only works on picture input from a video tape.  
On:  
Noise reduction works for input video.  
Off:  
Live 15:10:46  
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input signal as it is.  
Current time  
§
Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu  
(60).  
No display  
TV audio type  
STEREO: STEREO stereo broadcast  
M 1/M 2: Bilingual dual-sound broadcast  
M 1: Monaural broadcast  
RQT9075  
53  
HDD, disc and card management  
Instructions/notes regarding SD cards and SD drive are  
applicable to the DMR-EH68 model only.  
Setting the protection  
[RAM]  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
[SD]  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
Common procedures  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.  
After performing steps 1–3 (left)  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc  
1
While stopped  
Protection” and press [OK].  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
press [OK].  
and press [OK].  
DVD  
Titles  
Used  
11  
0 : 22  
Remain 5:38 (EP)  
Management  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
DVD-RAM  
FUNCTION MENU  
Disc Name  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
Playback  
G-Code Record  
Advanced Copy  
Playlists  
Disc Protection  
Delete all titles  
On  
Recording  
SELECT  
Delete  
Copy  
Flexible Rec  
DV Auto Rec  
Setup  
OK  
Format Disc  
RETURN  
To Others  
OK  
HDD Management  
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-  
protected.  
RETURN  
To return to the previous screen  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
Management”, “DVD Management” or  
“Card Management” and press [OK].  
e.g., [RAM]  
DVD  
Cartridge-protection  
Titles  
Used  
11  
0 : 22  
Remain 5:38 (EP)  
Management  
DVD-RAM  
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge  
Disc Name  
With the write-protect tab in the protect position,  
play automatically starts when inserted in the  
Disc Protection  
Delete all titles  
Off  
PROTECT  
unit.  
SELECT  
[SD]  
OK  
Format Disc  
RETURN  
Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.  
When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and  
“Format HDD” are displayed.  
When SD has been selected, “Format Card” only is  
displayed.  
Providing a name for a disc  
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
You can provide a name for each disc.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
[RAM] Release protection (above, Setting the protection).  
After performing steps 1–3 (left)  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”  
and press [OK].  
(42, Entering text)  
The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is  
displayed on the Top Menu.  
[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other  
equipment after creating top menu.  
Documentary  
My favorite  
01  
01/02  
DVD  
Management  
DVD-RAM  
Titles  
Used  
11  
0 : 22  
Remain 5:38 (  
02  
Chapter  
Chapter  
1
2
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT9075  
54  
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete  
all titles  
Deleting all the contents—Format  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)  
[SD]  
[HDD] [RAM]  
nt  
Preparation  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.  
[RAM] [SD] Release protection (54, Setting the protection).  
me  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
[RAM] Release protection (54, Setting the protection).  
ge  
na  
[Note]  
After performing steps 1–3 (54, Common procedures)  
ma  
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),  
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before  
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc or  
card even if you have set protection.  
d
r
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all  
a
titles” and press [OK].  
ndc  
After performing steps 1–3 (54, Common procedures)  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
a
c
press [OK].  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”,  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
,dis  
“Format Disc” or “Format Card” and  
press [OK].  
press [OK].  
HD  
A message appears when finished.  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
4 Press [OK].  
press [OK].  
To return to the previous screen  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
Press [RETURN].  
press [OK].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
A message appears when formatting is finished.  
[Note]  
Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may  
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).  
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.  
This can render the disc or the card unusable.  
[Note]  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be  
restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.  
Still picture data (JPEG), music data or computer data cannot be  
deleted.  
4 Press [OK].  
Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.  
[Note]  
When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it may not  
be possible to use it on any other equipment.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.  
You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.  
To stop formatting [RAM]  
Press [RETURN].  
You can cancel formatting if it takes more than 2 minutes. The disc  
must be reformatted if you do this.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT9075  
55  
HDD, disc and card management  
After finalising  
[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you  
can no longer record or edit.  
[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting  
(55) although it becomes play-only after finalising.  
When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] Titles are divided into about 5-minute ([+R] 8-  
minute)§ chapters, if  
Selecting the background style–Top  
Menu  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-  
Video top menu after finalising or Create Top Menu ([+RW]).  
the titles were directly recorded to the disc.  
the titles were copied using any mode other than the high  
speed mode (excluding [-R]DL] [+R]DL]).  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
§ This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode  
of recording.  
After performing steps 1–3 (54, Common procedures)  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”  
and press [OK].  
There is a pause of several seconds between titles and  
chapters during play.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
background and press [OK].  
Top Menu List  
Before  
After  
finalising  
finalising  
Recording/Editing/Entering name  
Play on other players  
1
2
3
You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s  
equipment.  
If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than  
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be  
displayed.  
Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players  
due to the condition of the recording.  
Display after finalising  
01  
Thumbnail  
(Still picture)  
Title Name  
You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (37,  
Change Thumbnail)  
Selecting whether to show the Top  
Menu first–Auto-Play Select  
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
[+RW]  
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.  
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient  
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW  
disc on other equipment.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.  
After performing steps 1–3 (54, Common procedures)  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play  
Select” and press [OK].  
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (left)  
before creating top menu.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or  
After performing steps 1–3 (54, Common procedures)  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top  
Menu” and press [OK].  
“Title 1” and press [OK].  
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.  
Title 1:  
The disc content is played without displaying the  
top menu.  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
press [OK].  
Enabling discs to be played on other  
equipment–Finalise  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
press [OK].  
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (above)  
before finalising the disc.  
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.  
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.  
Preparation  
4 Press [OK].  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
[Note]  
After performing steps 1–3 (54, Common procedures)  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and  
press [OK].  
You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the  
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such  
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
To return to the previous screen  
press [OK].  
Press [RETURN].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
press [OK].  
A message appears when finalising is finished.  
[Note]  
You cannot cancel finalising.  
Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.  
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)  
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.  
This will render the disc unusable.  
4 Press [OK].  
[Note]  
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take  
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately four  
times).  
RQT9075  
56  
Changing the unit’s settings  
You can change the unit’s settings using the Setup menu.  
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.  
To change the tuning settings for individual programme  
position  
Common procedures  
e.g., [Australia]and]N.Z.]  
1
While stopped  
Manual Tuning  
Pos Name Ch  
Pos Name Ch  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
ings  
1
2
3
ARD  
ZDF  
N3  
4
2
5
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
t
e
Pos  
Name  
Channel  
Fine Tuning  
Mono  
1
ARD  
4
Auto  
Off  
Manual  
4
5
HR3  
BR3  
8
10  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “To Others”  
Tuning  
s
s
6
7
8
9
SELECT  
OK  
and press [OK].  
RETURN  
SELECT  
10  
Delete  
Move  
unit’  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
Add  
e
RETURN  
press [OK].  
RETURN : leave  
Menus  
Options  
Tabs  
Setup  
ingth  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and  
Comb Filter  
Still Mode  
Seamless Play  
On  
Automatic  
On  
press [OK].  
ha  
C
/
Tuning  
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].  
Disc  
nt  
e
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
Connection  
Others  
Pos  
To change the programme position in which  
the TV stations are assigned  
Press [3, 4] or numbered buttons to select the  
number of the desired programme position and  
press [OK].  
m
e
TAB  
g
SELECT  
OK  
RETURN  
na  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and  
ma  
Name  
Channel  
To enter or change the name of a TV station  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name and  
press [OK].  
If the station name needs a blank space, select  
the blank between “Z” and “¢”.  
d
r
press [1].  
a
5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and  
ndc  
press [OK].  
a
c
To enter newly available TV stations or  
change the channel number of an already  
tuned TV station  
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to enter  
the channel number of the desired TV station.  
Wait a few moments until the desired TV station  
has been tuned.  
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and  
,dis  
press [OK].  
HD  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN].  
After the desired TV station is tuned, press  
[OK].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
Fine Tuning To obtain the best tuning condition  
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning condition  
and press [OK].  
Tuning  
Press [1] to return to “Auto”.  
Manual Tuning  
Video  
To select the video system type  
Press [3, 4] to select “PAL” or “SECAM” if the  
picture lacks colour, and press [OK].  
Auto  
You can add or delete channels, or change programme positions.  
System§  
Setup  
Manual Tuning  
Auto-Setup Restart  
This unit automatically distinguishes PAL and  
SECAM signals.  
Download from TV  
Tuning  
Disc  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
PAL  
For receiving PAL signals.  
Manual Tuning  
SECAM  
Pos Name Ch  
Pos Name Ch  
TAB  
1
2
ARD  
ZDF  
N3  
4
2
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
For receiving SECAM signals.  
This setting is also available when you select  
the external input channel (AV1, AV2, AV3,  
AV4) in step 1 (above).  
In order to record properly, make the  
appropriate settings to match the connected  
equipment.  
SELECT  
OK  
Connection  
Others  
RETURN  
3
4
5
5
8
10  
HR3  
BR3  
6
7
8
9
SELECT  
OK  
RETURN  
10  
Delete  
Move  
Add  
Audio  
To select the audio reception type  
Mode§  
If sound quality is poor, press [3, 4] to select  
To delete a programme position  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the  
“BG”, “I” or “DK” and press [OK].  
BG  
“Red” button.  
PAL B.G.  
I  
To add a blank programme position  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the  
“Green” button.  
PAL I  
DK  
PAL D.K.K1  
To move a TV station to another programme position  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press  
the “Yellow” button.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the new programme position to  
which you want to assign the TV station and press [OK].  
Mono  
To select the type of sound to be recorded  
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo sound  
is distorted due to inferior reception conditions,  
or if you want to record the normal (mono)  
sound during a stereo, bilingual or NICAM  
broadcast, and press [OK].  
[Note]  
When the unit sets itself automatically with VIERA Link function  
(10), only deletion of the programme position can be performed.  
§Only for Asia and Middle East  
RQT9075  
57  
Changing the unit’s settings  
Auto-Setup Restart  
Settings for Recording  
Download from TV  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (10) fails for some  
reason.  
Recording time in EP mode  
Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a VIERA  
Link (HDAVI Control 3) compatible TV with a HDMI cable.  
(Programme positions are downloaded from the TV for the channels  
in this unit’s channel coverage and copied through this convenient  
function.)  
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode  
(21, Recording modes and approximate recording times).  
[EP (6 Hours)]  
You can record for 6 hours on an unused  
4.7 GB disc.  
[EP (8 Hours)]  
You can record for 8 hours on an unused  
4.7 GB disc.  
When the confirmation screen appears  
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The sound quality is better when using “EP (6 Hours)” than  
when using “EP (8 Hours)”.  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
If the country setting menu appears on the television  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the country and press  
Aspect for Recording  
[OK].  
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.  
[Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original  
aspect used when recording started (including  
You can also use the following method to restart Auto-Setup.  
When the unit is on and stopped  
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the  
country setting screen§ or the Auto-Setup screen appears.  
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and  
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording  
programmes are also cancelled.  
when recording started at a commercial, etc.).  
[16:9]  
[4:3]  
When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec  
for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded  
in the original aspect ratio.  
In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,  
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.  
§
Only for Australia and N.Z.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or  
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.  
Disc  
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)  
Rec for High Speed Copy  
Settings for Playback  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R  
DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using  
high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is restricted  
(below).  
Ratings  
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.  
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password with  
the numbered buttons when the password screen is shown.  
Do not forget your password.  
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to  
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.  
This setting is effective when recording from a television  
programme or external equipment (including DV equipment), or  
when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.  
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)  
[8 No Limit]  
[1 to 7]  
All DVD-Video can be played.  
[On]  
You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press  
[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The following restrictions are applied to recorded  
titles.  
Recordings are made using the aspect ratio  
set in “Aspect for Recording” (above).  
Select the type of audio in advance from  
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (59).  
You are no longer able to switch the audio  
when watching a programme on an input  
channel on the TV connected to this unit (e.g.,  
AV1, etc).  
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding  
ratings recorded on them.  
[0 Lock All]  
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.  
Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)  
[Unlock Recorder]  
[Change Level]  
[Change Password]  
[Temporary Unlock]  
Soundtrack  
[English]  
[Spanish]  
[Original]  
[German]  
[French]  
[Italian]  
[Off]  
The original language of each disc will be  
selected.  
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy  
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed  
copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X  
discs).  
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§  
Subtitle  
[Maximum]  
[Normal (Silent)]  
The noise generated by this unit is less  
than when “Maximum” is selected,  
however the time required for copying will  
double (approximately).  
[Automatic]  
If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not  
available, subtitles of that language will  
automatically appear if available on that disc.  
[English]  
[German]  
[French]  
[Italian]  
[Spanish]  
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§  
Menus  
[English]  
[German]  
[French]  
[Italian]  
[Spanish]  
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§  
§
[Other ¢¢¢¢]  
Enter a code (67) with the numbered buttons.  
When the selected language is not available on the disc, the  
default language is played. There are discs where you can only  
switch the language from the menu screen (16).  
[DVD-V]  
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.  
Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you  
make here.  
RQT9075  
58  
DTS  
Picture  
Select how to output the signal.  
Select “Bitstream” if the connected  
equipment decodes the signal.  
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal  
and outputs it as 2 channels.  
Not making the proper settings may  
result in noise.  
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)  
Comb Filter  
Select the picture sharpness when recording.  
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC” (60).  
ings  
t
e
[On] Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this  
setting.  
[Bitstream]  
When connecting to equipment displaying the  
DTS logo.  
s
s
[Off] Select it when recording noisy pictures.  
[PCM]  
When connecting to equipment not displaying the  
DTS logo.  
Still Mode  
unit’  
e
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (78,  
MPEG  
Frames and fields).  
Select how to output the signal.  
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.  
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2  
channels.  
[Automatic]  
[Field]  
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is  
selected. (The picture is coarser.)  
ingth  
Not making the proper settings may result in noise.  
[Frame]  
Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be  
seen clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The  
picture is clearer and finer.)  
Cha  
[Bitstream]  
When connected to equipment with a built-in  
MPEG decoder.  
[PCM]  
When connected to equipment without a built-in  
MPEG decoder.  
Seamless Play  
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and  
partially deleted titles.  
Audio Mode for XP Recording  
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.  
[On] The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does  
not work when there are several audio types included on  
the playlist and when using Quick View (PLAYa1.3).  
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may  
change slightly.  
[Dolby Digital] (78) [LPCM] (78)  
The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that  
of normal XP mode recordings.  
The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected  
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.  
When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in  
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (left).  
[Off] The points where chapters in playlists change are played  
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.  
Audio Mode for DV Input  
Sound  
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV  
input terminal (23).  
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)  
[Stereo 1] Records audio (L1, R1).  
Dynamic Range Compression  
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)  
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.  
[Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)  
subsequent to original recording.  
[Mix]  
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.  
[On]  
[Off]  
When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in  
Bilingual Audio Selection  
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (left).  
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:  
Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-  
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.  
Display  
“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.  
Recording or copying sound in LPCM (right, “Audio Mode for  
XP Recording”).  
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)  
On-Screen Messages  
[M 1]  
[M 2]  
Choose whether to show status messages automatically.  
You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an  
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette  
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV  
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.  
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of  
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (right).  
[Automatic]  
[Off]  
Grey Background  
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey  
background when tuner reception is weak.  
[On]  
[Off]  
Digital Audio Output  
FL Display  
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through  
this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (64).  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.  
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”  
(61) to “On”.  
[Bright]  
[Dim]  
PCM Down Conversion  
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.  
Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the settings below if  
the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the  
disc has copy protection.  
[Automatic]  
The display turns dark during play and disappears when  
the unit is turned off. It reappears momentarily if a button  
is pressed. While using this mode, the standby power  
consumption can be reduced.  
[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the  
connected equipment cannot process signals with a  
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)  
Pause Live TV Icon  
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the on-screen  
icon while using the Pause Live TV function.  
[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the  
connected equipment can process signals with a  
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)  
[On]  
[Off]  
Dolby Digital  
Select how to output the signal.  
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.  
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2 channels.  
Not making the proper settings may result in noise.  
[Bitstream]  
When connecting to equipment displaying the  
Dolby Digital logo.  
RQT9075  
[PCM]  
When connecting to equipment not displaying the  
Dolby Digital logo.  
59  
Changing the unit’s settings  
Aspect for 4:3 Video  
Connection  
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)  
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be  
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may  
not be able to change the settings.  
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how  
to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.  
[4:3]  
Picture output expands left or right.  
[16:9]  
Picture is output as original aspect with  
side panels.  
TV Aspect  
Set to match the type of television connected.  
[16:9]  
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.  
Digital Audio Output  
[HDMI and Optical]  
[Pan & Scan] When connected to a 4:3 aspect  
television, side picture is trimmed  
for 16:9 picture.  
[Optical Only]  
Select when this unit is connected to an  
amplifier with an optical digital audio  
cable and connected to a TV with an  
HDMI cable and you want to enjoy the  
highest quality of audio from discs  
(64).  
[Letterbox]  
When connected to a 4:3 aspect  
television. 16:9 picture is shown in  
the letterbox style.  
Progressive  
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma  
television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan.  
This setting is fixed with “Off” if you set “AV1 Output” to “RGB 1  
(without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.  
VIERA Link  
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an  
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.  
[On]  
[Off]  
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.  
[On]  
[Off]  
[Note]  
AV1 Output  
When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube)  
or a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is  
progressive compatible, progressive output can cause some  
flickering. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned about it  
(53).  
Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an  
incompatible television.  
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.  
Select “Video (with component)” or “S Video (with component)” for  
component output (progressive output).  
If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select  
“RGB 1 (without component)” or “RGB 2 (without component)”.  
[Video (with component)]  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite  
signal.  
TV System  
[S Video (with component)]  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video  
signal.  
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting  
with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles  
on the HDD.  
[RGB 1 (without component)]  
[PAL]  
Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system  
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as  
PAL 60.  
Select to record television programmes and PAL input  
from other equipment.  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.  
If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB  
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch  
to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.  
[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on  
the HDD.  
[RGB 2 (without component)]  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal.  
If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only  
when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.  
[NTSC] Select when connecting to a NTSC television.  
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.  
Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.  
[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded  
on the HDD.  
AV2 Input  
Set according to the output signal of the connected equipment.  
[Note]  
[Video]  
[S Video]  
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have  
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can  
be recorded onto the HDD.)  
During redording, timer recording standby, this unit cannot play  
discs or titles that do not match the “TV System” setting. It is  
recommended “TV System” be set to match the discs or title  
before playing them.  
To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)  
While stopped, keep pressing [] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the  
main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.  
HDMI Settings  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
HDMI Video Format  
You can only select items compatible with the connected  
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.  
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may  
be improved by changing the setting.  
To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need  
to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this  
unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must  
also be 1080p compatible.  
[576i/480i] [576p/480p]  
[720p]  
[1080i]  
[1080p]  
When setting video output to “1080p”, we  
recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that  
have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).  
[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best  
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,  
720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).  
RQT9075  
60  
Quick Start  
The Quick Start feature enables this unit to be ready to start  
recording as quick as approx. 1 second§ after turning it on. You  
can start recording soon after deciding you want to record  
something.  
Others  
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)  
§
Only when recording to the HDD or DVD-RAM.  
Remote Control  
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote  
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic  
products close together.  
[On]  
ings  
t
e
[Off]  
Standby power consumption is less than when this is set to  
“On”.  
s
s
[DVD 1]  
[DVD 2]  
[DVD 3]  
(If this is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically turned to “Off”.)  
Startup takes up to a minute when:  
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.  
You play a disc or start recording to discs other than DVD-RAM.  
You want to make other operations.  
The clock has not been set.  
unit’  
1 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or  
e
“DVD 3”) and press [OK].  
Remote Control  
Setup  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Country  
[Australia]  
Press “” and “OK” together  
for more than 5 seconds on the remote  
control.  
ingth  
Tuning  
Disc  
[New Zealand]  
[Others]  
Cha  
Picture  
DivX Registration  
To change the code on the remote control  
2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button  
([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.  
3 Press [OK].  
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-  
on-Demand (VOD) content (29).  
Initialize  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
When the following indicator appears on the  
unit’s display  
Shipping Condition  
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and  
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording  
programmes are also cancelled.  
The unit’s remote control code  
[Yes]  
[No]  
Default Settings  
Change the code on the remote control to match the main unit’s  
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings,  
country settings§, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings  
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.  
(step 2).  
[Note]  
§
Only for Australia and N.Z.  
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the  
main unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1  
(step 2).  
[Yes]  
[No]  
List of TV Reception Channels  
Clock  
[For]Asia]  
In the case of a power failure, the clock setting remains in  
memory for approximately 60 minutes.  
Tuner  
System  
Channel  
Coverage  
VHF  
UHF  
CATV  
Clock  
PAL–DK,  
OIRT  
CCIR  
R1–R12  
21  
69  
44 MHz to  
470 MHz  
SECAM–DKK1  
Time  
15  
Date  
1
:
45  
:
39  
.
8
.
2008  
PAL–BGH,  
SECAM–BG  
E2–E12 E21–E69  
S01–S05  
M1–M10  
U1–U10  
S21–S41  
Number  
0
9
Please set clock manually.  
OK: store RETURN: leave  
CHANGE  
SELECT  
OK  
RETURN  
1 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.  
The items change as follows:  
PAL–I  
Hong  
Kong  
21  
13  
69  
57  
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year  
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J  
2 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.  
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.  
3 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.  
The clock starts.  
PAL–D  
China  
1–12  
Z1Z35  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Tuner  
System  
Channel  
Coverage  
VHF  
0–12  
1–11  
UHF  
CATV  
Power Save  
PAL–B  
Australia  
28–69  
21–69  
45 MHz to  
470 MHz  
[On]  
Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned to  
standby (77).  
PAL–BG  
New  
44 MHz to  
470 MHz  
[Off]  
Zealand  
(If “Quick Start” is set to “On”, “Power Save” is automatically  
turned to “Off”.)  
Refer to the following when “Power Save” is set to “On”.  
FL Display” is automatically set to “Automatic” (59).  
The “Quick Start” function does not work. (It is automatically  
turned to “Off”.)  
[For]Middle]East]  
Tuner  
System  
Channel  
Coverage  
VHF  
R1–R12  
UHF  
21 69  
CATV  
PAL–DK,  
SECAM–  
DKK1  
OIRT  
44 MHz to  
470 MHz  
PAL–BGH,  
SECAM–BG  
CCIR  
E2–E12 E21–E69  
S01–S05  
M1–M10  
U1–U10  
S21–S41  
PAL–I  
South  
Africa  
4
13  
21  
69  
RQT9075  
61  
Other Settings  
2 Test by turning on the television and  
changing channels.  
Television operation  
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn  
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the  
television channel and change the television volume.  
Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows  
correct operation.  
If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for  
your television does not allow control of your television, this  
remote control is not compatible with your television.  
DVD  
TV  
[Note]  
B
B
Volume  
VOL  
If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the  
one that allows correct operation.  
CH  
Turn TV on/off  
Input select  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
Channel  
Select  
2 3  
1
CH  
4 5 6  
Child Lock  
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote  
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.  
1 Point the remote control at the  
Press and hold [OK] and  
[RETURN]  
simultaneously until “X  
HOLD” appears on the  
unit’s display.  
television  
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code  
with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
01:  
[0] [1]  
10:  
[1] [0]  
Manufacturer and Code No.  
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears  
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.  
Brand  
Panasonic  
AIWA  
Code  
01/02/03/04  
35  
Brand  
Code  
05/28  
METZ  
MITSUBISHI  
MIVAR  
05/19/20/47  
To cancel the Child Lock  
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] simultaneously until “X HOLD”  
disappears.  
AKAI  
27/30  
24  
36  
33  
BEJING  
BEKO  
33  
NEC  
05/71/72/73/ NOBLEX  
74  
BENQ  
58/59  
NOKIA  
25/26/27/  
60/61  
BP  
09  
NORDMENDE  
OLEVIA  
10  
BRANDT  
BUSH  
10/15  
05  
45  
ONWA  
30/39/70  
05  
CENTREX  
CHANGHONG  
CURTIS  
DAEWOO  
DESMET  
DUAL  
66  
ORION  
69  
PEONY  
49/69  
41/48/64  
05/06/46  
05  
05  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
PHONOLA  
PIONEER  
PROVIEW  
PYE  
64/65  
05  
05  
37/38  
52  
ELEMIS  
FERGUSON  
FINLUX  
FISHER  
FUJITSU  
FUNAI  
05  
10/34  
61  
05  
RADIOLA  
SABA  
05  
21  
10  
53  
SALORA  
SAMSUNG  
26  
63/67  
32/42/43/  
65/68  
GOLDSTAR  
GOODMANS  
GRADIENTE  
GRUNDIG  
05/50/51  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
05  
05  
36  
09  
21/54/55/56  
05/29/30  
SCHNEIDER  
SEG  
05/69/75/  
76/77/78  
HIKONA  
HITACHI  
52  
SELECO  
05/25  
18  
05/22/23/40/ SHARP  
41  
INNO HIT  
IRRADIO  
ITT  
05  
30  
25  
49  
SIEMENS  
SINUDYNE  
SONY  
09  
05  
08  
JINGXING  
TCL  
31/33/66/  
67/69  
JVC  
17/30/39/70  
TELEFUNKEN  
10/11/12/  
13/14  
KDS  
52  
TEVION  
52  
KOLIN  
KONKA  
LG  
45  
TEX ONDA  
THOMSON  
TOSHIBA  
52  
62  
10/15/44  
16/57  
05  
05/50/51  
07/46  
LOEWE  
WHITE  
WESTINGHOUSE  
RQT9075  
MAG  
52  
YAMAHA  
18/41  
62  
Additional connections  
§
Leave “Yellow” unconnected.  
Connecting a television with  
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals  
Connecting a television with S VIDEO  
terminals  
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the  
Television’s rear panel  
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)  
AUDIO IN  
ions  
Y
t
COMPONENT  
R
L
Television’s rear panel  
VIDEO IN  
c
PB  
PR  
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO  
Red White  
R
L
IN  
IN  
one  
Component  
video cable  
Red White  
lc  
Audio/Video  
cable  
na  
o
i
(included)  
it  
S Video  
cable  
d
d
/A  
Audio/Video cable  
(included)  
Red White  
RF  
IN  
Y
ings  
PB  
AV1  
t
t
(
)
TV  
e
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
S
r
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
Red White  
This unit’s rear panel  
Othe  
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or  
progressive output (78) and provide a purer picture than the S  
VIDEO OUT terminal.  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
Connect to terminals of the same colour.  
[Required]setting]  
“Progressive” setting in the Setup menu (60)  
This unit’s rear panel  
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)  
Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is  
progressive compatible. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned  
about it (53). This is the same for multi system televisions using  
PAL mode.  
CRT  
DO NOT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
Progressive output  
This unit  
RQT9075  
63  
Additional connections  
Connecting an amplifier with a digital  
input terminal  
Connecting a stereo amplifier  
To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an  
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.  
[Required]setting]  
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (59)  
When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital  
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you  
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting  
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (60).  
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the  
television.  
Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),  
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.  
You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.  
Amplifier’s rear panel  
AUDIO IN  
R
L
Red White  
Amplifier’s rear panel  
OPTICAL IN  
Audio cable  
Insert fully, with  
this side facing  
up.  
Optical digital audio cable  
Do not bend sharply when  
connecting.  
Red White  
Y
This unit’s rear panel  
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
PR  
OPTICAL  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
This unit’s rear panel  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver  
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital  
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to  
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.  
Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,  
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.  
Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).  
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function  
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be  
possible. [34, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]  
Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.  
It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.  
Recommended part number:  
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.  
Television’s rear panel  
HDMI IN  
HDMI cable  
[Required]setting]  
Set “Digital Audio Output” to  
HDMI IN  
HDMI OUT  
“HDMI and Optical” (60).  
(The default setting is “HDMI and  
Optical”.)  
Receiver’s rear  
panel  
HDMI cable  
RF  
IN  
Y
HDMI AV OUT  
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
[Note]  
If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (78) and  
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)  
You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.  
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input  
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):  
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)  
RQT9075  
64  
Connecting a television and VCR  
To household mains socket  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Television’s rear panel  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz)  
ions  
t
To the aerial  
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
c
R
L
one  
Red White Yellow  
[For\Saudi\Arabia[  
BE SURE TO  
READ THE  
c
l
a
n
CAUTION FOR  
THE AC MAINS  
LEAD ON PAGE  
2 BEFORE  
o
i
dit  
d
A
CONNECTION.  
Other connections  
(9, 63)  
1
5
6
AC mains lead  
(included)  
Connect only after all other  
connections are complete.  
[For]Middle]East]  
Use the AC mains lead that matches  
the socket for the area you live in.  
[For]Asia]  
AC mains lead with a label is for  
Thailand.  
Audio/Video cable  
(included)  
Aerial cable  
AC mains lead without a label is for  
areas other than Thailand.  
RF  
IN  
Red White Yellow  
Y
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
AV OUT  
RedWhite Yellow  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
Cooling fan  
This unit’s rear panel  
RF coaxial cable  
DO NOT  
Connect the unit directly to the television  
If you connect the unit through an AV  
selector or video cassette recorder to the  
television, video signal will be affected by  
copyright protection systems and the picture  
may not be shown correctly.  
2
3
4
Television  
Audio/Video cable  
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
VCR  
This unit  
Red White Yellow  
When connecting to a television with a built-in VCR  
Connect to the input terminals on the television side if there  
are both television and VCR input terminals.  
VHF/UHF  
RF OUT  
R
L
RF IN  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
VCR’s rear panel  
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal  
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.  
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB  
output on this unit.  
[Required]setting]  
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (60)  
Connecting to a VCR with 21-pin Scart terminal  
You can also connect with the AV2 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.  
[Required]setting]  
“AV2 Input” in the Setup menu (60)  
RQT9075  
65  
Frequently asked questions  
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit operations.  
Set up  
Page  
64  
What equipment is necessary to play  
multi channel surround sound?  
You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without other equipment. You must  
connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a  
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder.  
Are the headphones and speakers  
directly connected to the unit?  
You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through the amplifier etc.  
64  
63  
The television has both S VIDEO IN and Connecting with the component video out terminal provides a more vivid picture  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals.  
Which terminal should I connect with?  
compared to connecting with the S Video out terminal.  
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan,  
connect through the component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.  
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using PAL mode that is  
compatible with progressive scan, we cannot recommend progressive output as some  
flickering can occur.  
Is my television progressive output  
compatible?  
All Panasonic televisions that have 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p input terminals  
are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of television.  
Disc  
Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs  
bought in another country?  
You cannot play DVD-Video if their region numbers are not supported by this unit.  
Cover  
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information.  
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a  
region number be played?  
The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a standard. You cannot play  
discs that do not have a region number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to  
a standard.  
Please tell me about disc compatibility  
with this unit.  
This unit records and plays DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and  
plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a  
DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible).  
This unit also records and plays high speed recording compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW discs.  
11–12  
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded in one of the following  
12, 14  
compatibility with this unit.  
standards: CD-DA, Video CD, DivX, MP3 and still pictures (JPEG).  
You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.  
Recording  
Can I record from a commercially  
purchased video cassette or DVD?  
Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy protected; therefore, recording  
is usually not possible.  
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW  
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and  
+RW recorded on this unit be played on  
other equipment?  
You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players after finalising the disc on  
this unit. However, depending on the condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and  
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.  
If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible equipment.  
Can a digital audio signal from this unit  
be recorded to other equipment?  
You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD, change the “Digital Audio  
Output” settings to the following in the Setup menu.  
PCM Down Conversion: On  
59  
Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM  
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is permitted and the recording  
equipment is compatible with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz.  
You cannot record MP3 signals.  
Can I switch to bilingual broadcast  
during recording?  
With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].  
(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”)  
With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you cannot. Change before  
recording with “Bilingual Audio Selection” in the Setup menu.  
26  
59  
43  
Can I high speed copy to a disc?  
Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to “On” before recording the  
programme.)  
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies.  
USB  
What can or cannot be done using the  
USB port on this unit?  
You can play DivX, MP3 or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB memory.  
You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the HDD or DVD-RAM.  
You can copy MP3 files on a USB memory to the HDD.  
28  
48  
50  
47  
[EH68] You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the HDD or DVD-RAM.  
Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB memory.  
Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory cannot be formatted on this  
unit.  
Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.  
13  
Music  
What will happen if I try to record the  
same CD multiple times?  
New album will be made following the existing album.  
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD No, you cannot.  
to the disc or USB memory?  
RQT9075  
66  
Messages  
Page  
28  
On the television  
Authorisation Error.  
You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different  
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX)  
Cannot finish recording completely. The programme was copy-protected.  
21  
es  
The HDD or disc may be full.  
g
a
The maximum number of programme has been exceeded.  
es  
Cannot playback.  
You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV  
system currently selected on the unit.  
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit.  
60  
TV system is different from the  
setting.  
/M  
s
n
To playback, please change the TV  
System in Setup.  
io  
est  
Cannot record to the disc.  
Unable to format.  
The disc may be dirty or scratched.  
15  
u
q
ed  
Cannot play on this unit.  
You tried to play a non-compatible image.  
Turn the unit off and re-insert the card.  
14  
15  
ask  
y
l
t
n
e
Cannot record. Disc is full.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.  
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is  
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW  
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.]  
19, 37,  
55  
u
Cannot record. Maximum number of  
titles exceeded.  
eq  
r
F
Use a new disc.  
14  
15  
13  
No Disc  
The disc may be upside down.  
No folders.  
There is no compatible folder in this unit.  
No SD CARD  
No valid SD card.  
[EH68]  
The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card already  
inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card.  
The card inserted is not compatible or the card format does not match.  
Not enough space in the copy  
destination.  
Create space by deleting any unnecessary items.  
19, 37,  
41, 55  
Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination  
Capacity” is not exceeded.  
46, 49,  
51  
This is a non-recordable disc.  
The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalised  
DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW.  
You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW.  
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the  
HDD and then copy to the disc.  
11  
This disc is not formatted properly.  
Format it using DVD Management in  
FUNCTION MENU.  
55  
Not enough space on HDD. Space  
of 4 hours (in SP mode) is  
necessary.  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD  
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are  
greater than 499.  
19  
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD.  
Maximum number of titles is  
recorded on HDD. Please delete  
unwanted titles.  
Rental Expired.  
The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)  
29  
$
The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.  
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.  
Abkhazian:  
Afar:  
Afrikaans:  
Albanian:  
Amharic:  
Arabic:  
Armenian:  
Assamese:  
Aymara:  
Azerbaijani:  
Bashkir:  
6566 Catalan:  
6565 Chinese:  
6570 Corsican:  
8381 Croatian:  
6577 Czech:  
6582 Danish:  
7289 Dutch:  
6583 English:  
6589 Esperanto:  
6590 Estonian:  
6665 Faroese:  
6985 Fiji:  
6765 Gujarati:  
9072 Hausa:  
6779 Hebrew:  
7282 Hindi:  
6783 Hungarian:  
6865 Icelandic:  
7876 Indonesian:  
6978 Interlingua:  
6979 Irish:  
7185 Lingala:  
7265 Lithuanian:  
7387 Macedonian:  
7273 Malagasy:  
7285 Malay:  
7383 Malayalam:  
7378 Maltese:  
7365 Maori:  
7165 Marathi:  
7384 Moldavian:  
7465 Mongolian:  
7487 Nauru:  
7578 Nepali:  
7583 Norwegian:  
7575 Oriya:  
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:  
7579 Persian:  
7585 Polish:  
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:  
Tamil:  
8465  
7684  
8277 Tatar:  
8279 Telugu:  
8285 Thai:  
8377 Tibetan:  
8365 Tigrinya:  
8484  
8469  
8472  
6679  
8473  
8479  
8482  
8475  
8487  
8575  
8582  
8590  
8673  
8679  
6789  
8779  
8872  
7473  
8979  
9085  
7775 Romanian:  
7771 Russian:  
7783 Samoan:  
7776 Sanskrit:  
7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:  
7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:  
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:  
6984 Italian:  
7779 Shona:  
7778 Sindhi:  
7865 Singhalese:  
7869 Slovak:  
7879 Slovenian:  
7982 Somali:  
8378 Twi:  
8368 Ukrainian:  
8373 Urdu:  
7079 Japanese:  
7074 Javanese:  
7073 Kannada:  
7082 Kashmiri:  
7089 Kazakh:  
7176 Kirghiz:  
7565 Korean:  
6869 Kurdish:  
6976 Laotian:  
7576 Latin:  
Basque:  
Bengali; Bangla:  
Finnish:  
8375 Uzbek:  
8376 Vietnamese:  
8379 Volapük:  
6983 Welsh:  
8385 Wolof:  
8387 Xhosa:  
8386 Yiddish:  
8476 Yoruba:  
8471 Zulu:  
6678 French:  
6890 Frisian:  
6672 Galician:  
6682 Georgian:  
6671 German:  
7789 Greek:  
Bhutani:  
Bihari:  
Breton:  
7065 Sundanese:  
8076 Swahili:  
8084 Swedish:  
8065 Tagalog:  
8185 Tajik:  
Bulgarian:  
Burmese:  
Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:  
Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:  
7679 Portuguese:  
7665 Punjabi:  
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:  
RQT9075  
67  
Messages  
On the unit’s display  
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.  
Page  
61  
DVD   
(“” stands for a number.)  
The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.  
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more  
than 5 seconds.  
HARD ERR§  
NoERAS  
If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
You cannot delete items on this disc.  
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.  
NoREAD  
The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit.  
This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc.  
15  
5
NoWRIT  
You cannot write to this disc.  
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.  
PLEASE WAIT§  
There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying  
out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait  
until the message disappears.  
PROG FULL§  
REMOVE  
There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes.  
25  
The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device and turn the unit off.  
SP 35:50  
LP 151h  
“SP”,LP” and the numbers  
are examples.  
Available space on the HDD or disc.  
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example  
“LP 151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available.  
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means  
“151 hours”.  
UNFORMAT§  
You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-  
Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment.  
Format the disc to use it.  
55  
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted.  
UNSUPPORT§  
You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on.  
You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory.  
11–12  
13  
F74  
F75  
U59  
The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.  
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.  
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
The unit is hot.  
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message  
disappears.  
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear  
of the unit.  
U61  
U76  
(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or  
copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not  
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.  
HDMI cannot be output because you are connected to a model that does not support copyright  
protection.  
U80  
U81  
U99  
The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode. Now  
press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.  
U88  
(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while  
recording, playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to  
normal operation; it is not broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again.  
69  
H or F  
There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s  
condition.)  
Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the  
following.  
69–74  
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.  
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)  
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the  
dealer. Inform the dealer of the service number when requesting service.  
X HOLD  
The Child Lock function is activated.  
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears.  
62  
§
The message are alternately displayed.  
RQT9075  
68  
Troubleshooting guide  
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart  
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.  
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:  
Regular disc rotating sounds.  
Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.  
Image disturbance during search.  
Interruptions in reception due to periodic terrestrial broadcasting  
breaks.  
The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being  
activated. (Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10  
seconds.)  
When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected  
sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.  
Operations are slow to respond in power save mode.  
Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a  
Panasonic disc.)  
nguide  
Power  
Page  
shot  
No power.  
Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active household mains socket.  
8, 65  
le  
The unit does not turn on  
pressing [Í DVD].  
oub  
r
The unit switches to standby  
mode.  
One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to turn the unit on.  
es/T  
The power is turned off  
automatically.  
If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV with an HDMI cable, this unit will  
be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode.  
34  
sag  
Me  
Displays  
The display is dim.  
Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu.  
59  
61  
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s  
display.  
Set the clock.  
The time recorded on the disc  
Times shown may disagree with actual times.  
and the available time shown do Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW increases only when the  
not add up.  
The displayed time of this unit is Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL, there is no  
different from the actual increase in disc space.  
recording time or MP3 recording More disc space than the actual recording time is used after recording or editing the DVD-R,  
time.  
last recorded title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted.  
DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200 times or more.  
While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.  
Compared to the actual recorded The displayed recording/play time is converted from the number of frames at 29.97 frames  
time, the elapsed time displayed  
is less.  
(Only when recording in NTSC)  
(equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time  
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as  
approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.  
“U88” is displayed and the disc  
cannot be ejected.  
The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following to eject the disc.  
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.  
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about  
10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.  
While the unit is off, press and hold [] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for  
about 5 seconds. Remove the disc.  
2
TV screen and video  
Television reception worsens  
after connecting the unit.  
This can occur because the signals are being divided between the unit and other equipment.  
It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not  
solved by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.  
Status messages do not appear. Select “Automatic” in “On-Screen Messages” in the Setup menu.  
59  
59  
The grey background does not  
appear.  
Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu.  
Picture does not appear during  
timer recording.  
Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off. To confirm the timer recording  
is going to work properly, turn the unit on.  
The 4:3 aspect ratio picture  
expands left and right.  
Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does not have that function, set  
“Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”.  
53  
Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.  
60  
60  
58  
Screen size is wrong.  
If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to “16:9” in the Setup menu.  
By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be  
made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.  
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “4:3”.  
58  
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating  
instructions.  
The screen changes  
automatically.  
The display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if there is no operation for  
5 minutes or more. Press [OK] to return to the previous screen.  
RQT9075  
69  
Troubleshooting guide  
TV screen and video (continued)  
Page  
The recorded title is stretched  
vertically.  
16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the following cases.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)”  
recording mode.  
If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.  
58  
If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in the Setup menu.  
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same aspect, set “Rec for High Speed  
Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”.  
By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a chance that the recording will be  
made using the wrong aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when recording.  
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating  
instructions.  
58  
There is a lot of after-image when Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”.  
53  
53  
playing video.  
When playing DVD-Video using  
progressive output, one part of  
the picture momentarily appears  
to be doubled up.  
Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is caused by the editing method or  
material used on DVD-Video, but should be corrected if you use interlace output.  
There is no apparent change in  
picture quality when adjusted  
with the Picture menu in the on-  
screen menus.  
The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.  
The images from this unit do not Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT terminal,  
8, 9, 63,  
64, 65  
appear on the television.  
S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals or HDMI AV OUT terminal on  
this unit.  
Make sure that the television’s input setting (e.g., AV 1) is correct.  
Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is not progressive compatible.  
Press and hold [] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds  
to cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.  
The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used by the disc now playing. While  
stopped, keep pressing [] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds.  
The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa.  
Picture is distorted.  
60  
When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that matches with this unit’s TV  
system.  
Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.  
Reduce the number of connected devices.  
The picture is distorted during  
play, or video will not play  
correctly.  
You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor reception or unfavorable weather  
conditions.  
The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear briefly between recorded titles in  
the following situations:  
between titles recorded with different recording modes.  
between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.  
between scenes recorded with different resolutions.  
between playlist chapters.  
Sound  
No sound.  
Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings. Check the input mode on the  
amplifier if you have connected one.  
8, 9, 59,  
63, 64, 65  
26  
Low volume.  
Distorted sound.  
Cannot hear the desired audio  
type.  
Press [AUDIO] to select the audio.  
Turn off V.S.S. in the following cases.  
When using discs that do not have surround sound effects such as Karaoke discs.  
When playing bilingual broadcast programmes.  
53  
Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)  
Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are connected with HDMI cables.  
Reduce the number of connected devices.  
The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is output from the HDMI AV OUT  
terminal or the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.  
To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to  
“HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu.  
Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be distorted if this unit is connected  
with an HDMI cable.  
If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you  
can only record either the main or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.  
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),  
+R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”.  
60  
58  
Cannot switch audio.  
You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.  
When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the  
disc tray while DVD drive is selected.  
When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM”.  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default setting is “On”).  
The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an HDMI cable. You cannot switch  
the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using  
audio cables.  
59  
58  
59, 64  
There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of how the disc was created.  
RQT9075  
70  
Operation  
Page  
62  
Cannot operate the television.  
The remote control doesn’t work.  
Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be operated even if you change the  
code.  
The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote  
control.  
61  
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time  
for more than 5 seconds.  
nguide  
The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.  
You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s remote control signal sensor during  
operation.  
Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.  
Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that may be subject to sunlight  
exposure.  
It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again after changing the batteries.  
It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after changing the batteries.  
The child lock function is activated.  
4
4
hot  
s
le  
oub  
r
T
61  
62  
62  
The unit is on but cannot be  
operated.  
Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected properly.  
Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.  
The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to disappear.  
One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.  
Reset the unit as follows:  
16, 17  
1Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.  
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for about  
10 seconds. The unit is forcibly switched to standby.  
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one minute, then reconnect it.  
2Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still cannot be operated, consult the  
dealer.  
Cannot eject disc.  
The unit is recording.  
62  
The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and hold [] and [CH W] on the  
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.  
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock  
function.  
Cannot tune channels.  
Check the connections.  
You must connect to a VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3) compatible TV with a HDMI cable to  
download channel presets.  
8, 65  
Cannot download channel  
presets from the television.  
Startup is slow.  
Make sure that “Quick Start” is set to “On”.  
61  
Startup takes time in the following situations:  
–A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.  
The clock is not set.  
Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is connected.  
For a few minutes after 5:15 am due to system maintenance of this unit.  
When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.  
RQT9075  
71  
Troubleshooting guide  
Recording, timer recording and copying  
Page  
11  
Cannot record.  
Cannot copy.  
You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be recorded on. Insert a disc the  
unit can record onto.  
The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the disc is protected with DVD  
Management.  
55  
54  
Some programmes have limitations on the number of times they can be recorded (CPRM).  
You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the number of titles has reached  
its limit. Delete unwanted titles or use a new disc.  
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit.  
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.  
78  
19, 37,  
55  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy. Delete unnecessary titles from the  
HDD and then copy.  
19, 37,  
55  
If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will copy titles from the HDD to a  
blank disc and fill the entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode  
recording is necessary).  
If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be copied has exceeded 499.  
You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you can record and copy again if  
you format DVD-RW.  
Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and  
+RW you may be unable to record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or  
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty times.  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit  
may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.  
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL signal recordings.  
(However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded  
with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.  
Cannot record from external  
equipment.  
Check that the connection is correct.  
Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.  
23, 65  
Timer recording does not work  
properly.  
The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme times overlap. Correct the  
25  
24  
61  
programme.  
The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer icon “F” in the timer recording  
list is not on.)  
Set the clock.  
G-CODE§ programming does not  
work properly.  
§
Only for Australia and N.Z.  
Timer recording does not stop  
even when [] is pressed.  
Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
recording drive.  
If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while “Quick Start” is set to “On”,  
you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.  
24  
The timer programme remains  
even after recording finishes.  
The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.  
24  
A part or whole of a recorded  
title has been lost.  
If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the household mains socket while  
recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.  
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. We cannot offer  
any guarantee regarding lost programmes or discs.  
55  
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc.  
disc using the high speed mode.  
When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” in the Setup menu. (The  
default setting is “On”).  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot  
perform high-speed copy.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD recorders with “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL  
or +RW discs with high-speed copy.  
58  
When copying, it takes a long  
time even when high speed  
mode is selected.  
Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if the disc is high speed  
recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the  
disc.  
It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.  
You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours when using other Panasonic  
DVD Recorders that are not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.  
An unusually loud sound is  
coming from the rotating DVD-R,  
etc.  
When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video  
format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal,  
however, this is not a problem.  
The DV automatic recording  
function does not work.  
If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted, check the connections and DV  
equipment settings.  
You cannot start recording until the images from the DV equipment appear on the television.  
Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes on the tape in the DV  
equipment are not successive.  
Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may not operate properly.  
The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV tape.  
23  
23  
RQT9075  
72  
Play  
Page  
Play fails to start even when  
[1] (PLAY) is pressed.  
Play starts but then stops  
immediately.  
Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up.  
15  
15  
The disc is dirty.  
You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.  
You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the equipment used for recording.  
You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that was recorded to DVD-RAM  
using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to  
copyright protection.  
When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP (8 Hours)” mode, play may not be possible on DVD  
players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP (6 Hours)” mode.  
You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.  
11–12  
58  
nguide  
29  
If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you purchased it. (DivX)  
Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages are displayed, follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
hot  
s
le  
Audio and video momentarily  
pause.  
This occurs between playlist chapters.  
oub  
This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high  
speed mode.  
r
T
This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.  
11  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches  
between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video  
and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.  
DVD-Video is not played.  
You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change this setting.  
Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is not defective.  
58  
Cover  
Alternative soundtrack and  
subtitles cannot be selected.  
The languages are not recorded on the disc.  
You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the soundtrack and subtitles on  
some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes.  
16  
No subtitles.  
Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.  
Turn the subtitles on. Set “Subtitle” on the on-screen menu to “On”.  
52  
Angle cannot be changed.  
Angles can only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.  
You have forgotten your ratings  
password.  
You want to cancel the ratings  
level.  
The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE  
SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main  
unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on the unit’s display).  
Quick View does not work.  
This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.  
This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.  
The resume play function does  
not work.  
Memorized positions are cancelled when  
press [] several times.  
open the disc tray.  
[SD] ([EH68]) [CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the power.  
if a recording or timer recording was executed.  
The Video CD picture does not  
display properly.  
When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV System” in the Setup menu.  
When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture cannot be displayed correctly during  
search.  
60  
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does These functions do not work with finalised discs.  
60  
not work.  
Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings are different from the title  
recorded on the disc.  
It takes time before play starts.  
Picture stops.  
This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)  
Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)  
Cannot see the beginning of the (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI cable)  
title played.  
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able to see the  
beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the  
beginning of the title.  
Edit  
Available disc space does not  
increase even after deleting a  
title.  
Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL.  
Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video  
format) and +RW. The disc space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.  
19  
Cannot edit.  
You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available space.  
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space.  
19  
Cannot format.  
The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.  
You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in this unit.  
15  
11–12  
Cannot create chapters.  
The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when you turn it off or remove the  
disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption to the power before this.  
These operations are not possible with still pictures.  
You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You cannot set an end point before  
a start point.  
Cannot mark the start point or  
the end point during “Partial  
Delete” operation.  
Cannot delete chapters.  
Cannot create a playlist.  
When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer.  
37  
You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title also includes still pictures. Select  
them individually.  
Music  
Tracks could not be copied to  
the HDD.  
If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS restrictions, they will not be copied.  
Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.)  
cannot be guaranteed.  
Bonus tracks may not be copied.  
ID3 tag of a MP3 file is not  
completely displayed.  
Only the track name and artist name can be displayed with this unit.  
RQT9075  
73  
Troubleshooting guide  
Still pictures  
Page  
Cannot display Direct Navigator  
screen.  
This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy.  
Cannot edit or format a card.  
Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards, the “Write Protection Off” message  
54  
([EH68])  
sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.)  
The contents of the card cannot  
be read.  
([EH68])  
Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this does not solve the problem, turn  
off and turn on the unit again.  
The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The contents on the card may be damaged.) 13, 14  
This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and  
FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format.  
The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible with this  
unit.  
You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB to 2 GB and SDHC Memory Cards  
with capacities from 4 GB to 16 GB.  
This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures or MPEG4 on an SD card.  
13  
Copying, deleting and setting  
protection takes a long time.  
([EH68])  
When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes take a few hours.  
55  
When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take a long time. Format the disc or  
card.  
USB  
The contents of the USB memory Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert again. If this does not solve the  
cannot be read.  
problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.  
Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly.  
The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not compatible with the unit. (The  
contents on the USB memory may be damaged.)  
The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file extensions that are not compatible  
with this unit.  
Turn off and then turn on the unit again.  
USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a USB hub may not be  
recognized by this unit.  
15  
13, 14  
14  
Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit.  
If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB memory may not be  
recognized by this unit.  
13  
VIERA Link  
VIERA Link doesn’t work.  
Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is displayed on the front display when  
the power for the main unit is set to On.  
Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”.  
60  
Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.  
Some functions may not work if depending on the version of “HDAVI Control” of the connected  
equipment. This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” functions.  
If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was changed, or if there was a  
power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control” may  
not work.  
In this case, perform the following operations.  
1When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the power on, turn the TV (VIERA)  
on again.  
2Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control” function to off, and then set to on  
again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)  
3Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit, and after this unit’s screen is  
displayed check that “HDAVI Control” is working.  
The operation on this unit (music The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press buttons on the TV remote  
playback etc.) is interrupted.  
control that do not work for VIERA Link functions.  
To reset this unit  
To return all the settings other  
than the main ones to the factory  
preset  
Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the settings except for the ratings  
level, ratings password and clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording  
programmes are also cancelled.  
61  
61  
Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the settings other than the tuning  
settings, clock settings, country settings§, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings  
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.  
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the country setting screen§ or the  
Auto-Setup screen appears. All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and  
clock settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes are also  
cancelled.  
§
Only for Australia and N.Z.  
To reset the ratings level  
settings  
While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive, then press and  
hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.  
To restore the unit if it freezes  
due to one of the safety devices  
being activated  
Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The settings remain.)  
RQT9075  
74  
Safety precautions  
Placement  
Foreign matter  
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high  
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These  
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby  
shortening the unit’s service life.  
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric  
shock or malfunction.  
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or  
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the  
power supply and contact your dealer.  
Do not place heavy items on the unit.  
ions  
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain  
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.  
ut  
a
c
e
Voltage  
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit  
and cause a fire.  
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when  
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.  
Service  
pr  
y
t
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is  
e
f
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other  
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect  
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service  
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is  
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.  
/Sa  
AC mains lead protection  
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not  
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or  
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.  
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC  
mains lead can cause electric shock.  
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power  
source if it is not to be used for a long time.  
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric shock.  
hotnguide  
s
le  
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote  
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate  
if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree  
to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote  
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in  
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote  
Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will  
Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information  
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its  
rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.  
Gracenote® Corporate Description  
oub  
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by  
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music  
recognition technology and related content delivery.  
r
T
Gracenote® Proprietary Legends  
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©  
2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2007  
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more  
of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;  
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,  
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some  
services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.  
Patent: #6,304,523.  
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical  
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow  
the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who  
you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy  
Policy for the Gracenote service.  
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.  
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by  
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.  
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are  
licensed to you “AS IS.”  
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or  
implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the  
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from  
the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause  
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the  
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that  
functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be  
uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new  
enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may  
provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any  
time.  
R
Gracenote End-User License Agreement  
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE  
TERMS BELOW.  
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of  
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the  
“Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or file  
identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist,  
track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or  
embedded databases (collectively, Gracenote Servers”) and to perform  
other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended  
End-User functions of this application or device.  
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.  
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL  
BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE  
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE  
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL  
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.  
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote  
Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-  
commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or  
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third  
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE  
DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE  
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.  
RQT9075  
75  
Specifications  
Recording system  
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format  
DVD-R : DVD-Video format  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format  
Audio  
Recording system:  
Audio in:  
Input level:  
Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)  
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz  
More than 10 k≠  
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format  
+R  
+R DL (Double Layer)  
+RW  
Input impedance:  
Audio out:  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)  
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz  
Less than 1 k≠  
Output level:  
Output impedance:  
Recordable discs  
DVD-RAM:  
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)  
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),  
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)  
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),  
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)  
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)  
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),  
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)  
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),  
HDMI Output  
19 pin type A: 1 pc  
DVD-R:  
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 3” function.  
Video  
DVD-R DL:  
DVD-RW:  
Video system:  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]  
SECAM (only input)/PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields  
+R:  
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields  
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)  
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)  
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
+R DL:  
+RW:  
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields  
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields  
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)  
Recording system:  
Recording time  
Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)  
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours  
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East] Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] Video in (PAL/NTSC):  
[EH58]  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
Maximum Approx. 441 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)  
XP: Approx. 55 hours, SP: Approx. 110 hours  
LP: Approx. 221 hours, EP: Approx. 331 hours/441 hours  
[EH68]  
Maximum Approx. 567 hours with 320 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)  
XP: Approx. 71 hours, SP: Approx. 142 hours  
LP: Approx. 284 hours, EP: Approx. 426 hours/567 hours  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East] S-Video in (SECAM/PAL/NTSC):  
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.] S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):  
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
Video out (PAL/NTSC):  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):  
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 , termination  
Playable discs  
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format  
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, DivX§1  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format, DivX§1  
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format  
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW  
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 , termination  
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 , termination  
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 , termination  
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD  
CD-R/CD-RW : CD-DA§1, Video CD§1, MP3§1, JPEG§1, DivX§1  
Internal HDD capacity  
Optical pick-up  
[EH58] 250 GB  
[EH68] 320 GB  
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units  
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)  
LASER specification  
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)  
Wave length:  
CD  
DVD  
780 nm wave length  
662 nm wave length  
Laser power:  
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection  
RQT9075  
76  
Television system  
[For]Asia]  
Others  
Region code:  
[For]Asia]  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
[For]Middle]East]  
#3  
#4  
Tuner system  
Channel coverage  
R1 to R12  
21 to 69  
PAL-DK,  
SECAM-DKK1  
OIRT  
VHF:  
UHF:  
#2  
5 oC to 40 oC  
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)  
Operating temperature:  
Operating humidity range:  
Power supply:  
[For]Asia]and]Middle]East]  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
Power consumption:  
Dimensions (WkHkD):  
Mass:  
CATV: 44 MHz to 470 MHz  
PAL-BGH,  
SECAM-BG  
CCIR  
VHF:  
UHF:  
E2 to E12  
E21 to E69  
CATV: S01 to S05,  
ions  
t
AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz  
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz  
Approx. 36 W  
430 mmk59 mmk326 mm  
Approx. 4.2 kg  
ica  
if  
M1 to M10, U1 to U10, S21 to S41  
c
PAL-I  
Hong Kong  
UHF:  
21 to 69  
Spe  
Power consumption in standby mode:  
Approx. 2 W (Power Save mode)  
Approx. 8 W (Quick Start mode)  
PAL-D  
China  
VHF:  
UHF:  
1 to 12  
13 to 57  
CATV: Z1 to Z35  
RF converter output: Not provided  
[For]Australia]and]N.Z.]  
[Note]  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
§1 Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.  
§2 Includes miniSD cards. (A miniSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)  
Includes microSD cards. (A microSD adaptor needs to be inserted.)  
§3 Long file name is unsupported.  
Tuner system  
Channel coverage  
0 to 12  
28 to 69  
PAL-B  
Australia  
VHF:  
UHF:  
§4 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card or  
Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, to HDD or  
DVD-RAM disc. After Video Recording conversion and transfer to  
HDD or DVD-RAM disc, the playback is possible.  
CATV: 45 MHz to 470 MHz  
PAL-BG  
New Zealand  
VHF:  
UHF:  
1 to 11  
21 to 69  
CATV: 44 MHz to 470 MHz  
Useable capacity will be less. (SD card)  
RF converter output: Not provided  
[For]Middle]East]  
Tuner system  
Channel coverage  
R1 to R12  
21 to 69  
PAL-DK,  
SECAM-DKK1  
OIRT  
VHF:  
UHF:  
CATV: 44 MHz to 470 MHz  
PAL-BGH,  
SECAM-BG  
CCIR  
VHF:  
UHF:  
E2 to E12  
E21 to E69  
CATV: S01 to S05, M1 to M10,  
U1 to U10, S21 to S41  
PAL-I  
South Africa  
VHF:  
UHF:  
4–13  
21–69  
RF converter output: Not provided  
SD Card ([EH68])  
Slot:  
Compatible media:  
SD Memory Card slot: 1 pc  
SD Memory Card§2, SDHC Memory Card,  
MultiMediaCard  
Format:  
FAT12, FAT16§3  
(In case of SD Memory Card/MultiMediaCard)  
FAT32§3 (In case of SDHC Memory Card)  
Still picture (JPEG)  
Image file format:  
JPEG conforming DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)  
Number of pixels:  
Between 34 a 34 and 6144 a 4096  
sub sampling; 4:2:2 or 4:2:0  
Thawing time:  
Approx. 1.9 sec (6 M pixels, JPEG)  
Video (SD Video)§4  
Codec:  
File Format:  
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)  
SD-Video format conforming  
DV input  
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc  
USB port  
USB standard:  
Type A : 1 pc  
[EH68] USB 2.0 High Speed  
[EH58] USB 2.0 Full Speed  
FAT16, FAT32  
Format:  
Video (SD Video)§4 ([EH68])  
Codec:  
File Format:  
MPEG 2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)  
SD-Video format conforming  
RQT9075  
77  
Glossary  
Bitstream  
Frames and fields  
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see  
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.  
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)  
before it is decoded into its various channels.  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)  
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to  
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with  
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.  
u
r
Frame  
Field  
Field  
A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but  
picture quality is generally better.  
A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but  
there is no blurring.  
Decoder  
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This  
is called decoding.  
DivX  
HDD (Hard disk drive)  
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX  
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality  
that maintains a relatively small file size.  
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk  
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and  
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading  
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.  
Dolby Digital  
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby  
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can  
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can  
be recorded on one disc using this method.  
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default  
audio.  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)  
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital  
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-  
definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]  
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high  
definition compatible television is required.  
Down-mixing  
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)  
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on  
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to  
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s  
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then  
only output the front two channels.  
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.  
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,  
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The  
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering  
the degree of compression.  
Drive  
LPCM (Linear PCM)  
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on  
CDs.  
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc  
(DVD) and SD card (SD)([EH68]). These perform the reading and  
writing of data.  
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)  
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)  
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.  
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based  
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.  
SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be  
copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.  
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good  
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are  
possible.  
Dynamic range  
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound  
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest  
level of sound before distortion occurs.  
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the  
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low  
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
An audio compression method that compresses audio to  
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of  
audio quality.  
Pan&Scan/Letterbox  
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be  
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images  
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of  
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.  
Film and video  
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can  
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable  
method of progressive output.  
Pan & Scan:  
The sides are cut off so the picture  
fills the screen.  
Film:  
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24  
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs  
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)  
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.  
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL  
discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).  
Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or  
animation.  
Letterbox:  
Black bands appear at the top and  
bottom of the picture so the picture  
itself appears in an aspect ratio of  
16:9.  
Video:  
Playback control (PBC)  
Finalise  
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and  
information with menus.  
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc.  
possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL on this  
unit.  
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)  
Progressive/Interlace  
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer  
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for  
recording again.  
The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan  
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses  
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are  
called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.  
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video  
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.  
Folder  
This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD card ([EH68]) where  
groups of data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to  
the place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 ([EH68]) are stored.  
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.  
Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p  
input terminals are progressive compatible.  
Formatting  
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM  
recordable on recording equipment.  
Protection  
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or  
deletion protection.  
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),  
+RW, SD cards ([EH68]) and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on  
this unit.  
RGB  
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.  
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),  
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.  
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,  
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.  
RQT9075  
78  
Sampling frequency  
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave  
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital  
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per  
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the  
original sound.  
ry  
a
s
Thumbnail  
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display  
multiple pictures in the form of a list.  
os  
Gl  
1080i  
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass  
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because  
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of  
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic  
and rich image.  
1080p  
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the  
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.  
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,  
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.  
720p  
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same  
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since  
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there  
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.  
RQT9075  
79  
Index  
Adjust the audio quality  
(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Adjust the picture quality  
(Picture menu). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Album (CD)  
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Album (Still picture)  
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Aspect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
Audio  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . 25  
AV2 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Edit  
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 60, 78  
Properties  
Music on HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 40  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Protection  
Album (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
Enabling discs to be played on other  
equipment–Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 78  
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 78  
FR (Flexible Recording Mode). . . . . . . 21  
FUNCTION MENU window . . . . . . . . . . 33  
G-CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Group (MP3)  
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Channel  
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 36  
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Cleaning  
Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
HDAVI Control. . . . . . . . . 9, 34–35, 60, 64  
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 60, 64, 78  
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 58  
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
DV automatic recording. . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Relief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Timer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 24–25  
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Remote control code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 53  
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 78  
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
5
5
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Connection  
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 65  
Amplifier, system component,  
receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
DV input terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 64  
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 9, 63, 65  
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Copy  
Language  
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Soundtrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 58  
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 58  
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 78  
Manual Skip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Menu  
Music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Country setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Create Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 37  
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28–29  
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Mode  
Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 29  
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 32  
Music on HDD  
SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 22  
Soundtrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Still picture  
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Subtitle  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc  
(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Delete  
Album (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Album (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39  
Group (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Playlist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Still picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Track (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Digital Audio Output settings. . . . 59, 60  
Direct Navigator. . . . . . . . . 27, 30, 36, 40  
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11–12  
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
DivX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 28–29, 78  
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Time Slip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 24–25  
Tuning  
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
TV System (PAL/NTSC). . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Name  
Album (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Entering text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Group (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 37  
USB  
Copy (Music). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Copy (Still picture). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Supported formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 34–35, 60, 64  
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.  
p
RQT9075-L  
F0308YU0  

Intel Computer Hardware ULV Intel Celeron processor Embedded Engine Board User Manual
Jenn Air JGC8430BDQ User Manual
Jenn Air JGD8130ADW User Manual
JVC AV 21FT5BU User Manual
Leupold Computer Monitor HP92 User Manual
Philips 25PT 4475 User Manual
Philips 25SL5766 User Manual
Philips ADIM ADM0101 User Manual
Philips AVENT DVD Player DVP3560 User Manual
Philips PR1306C1 User Manual